All Downloads are FREE. Search and download functionalities are using the official Maven repository.

schemas.domain.1.0.domain.xsd Maven / Gradle / Ivy

There is a newer version: 8.0.0-JDK17-M9
Show newest version


  
  
    
      Corresponds to UnixMachineMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.UnixMachineMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Specifies whether a server running on this machine binds to a
 UNIX User ID (UID) after it has carried out all privileged startup
 actions.
            
          
          
            
              The UNIX user ID (UID) that a server running on this machine will run
 under after it has carried out all privileged startup actions.
 Otherwise, the server will continue to run under the account under which
 it was started.(Requires that you enable Post-Bind UID.)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether a server running on this machine binds to a
 UNIX Group ID (GID) after it has carried out all privileged startup
 actions.
            
          
          
            
              The UNIX group ID (GID) that a server running on this machine will run
 under after it has carried out all privileged startup actions.
 Otherwise, the server will continue to run under the group under which
 it was started.(Requires that you enable Post-Bind GID.)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to MachineMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MachineMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The addresses by which this machine is known. May be either host
 names or literal IP addresses.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the NodeManager Mbean that defines the configuration of the Node Manager instance that runs on the machine.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ConfigurationMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ConfigurationMBean)
    
    
      
        
          The user-specified name of this MBean instance.
        
        
          
            
          
        
      
      
        
          Optional information that you can include to describe this
 configuration.
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to NodeManagerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NodeManagerMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Returns the node manager type.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NodeManagerMBean Attribute=getNMType)
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The host name or IP address where Node Manager listens for
 connection requests.
            
          
          
            
              The port number where Node Manager listens for connection
 requests.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether communication with this Node Manager needs to
 be debugged. When enabled, Node Manager provides more information
 about request processing. This information is sent to the log of the
 server making requests to Node Manager.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the local command line to use when invoking SSH or RSH node
 manager functions.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NodeManagerMBean Attribute=getShellCommand)
            
          
          
            
              Returns the node manager home directory that will be used to substitute
 for the shell command template
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NodeManagerMBean Attribute=getNodeManagerHome)
            
          
          
            
              Gets the node manager client adapter name_version when using a VMM adapter to connect
 to OVM or other VMM adapter providers
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NodeManagerMBean Attribute=getAdapter)
            
          
          
            
              Gets the node manager client adapter name when using a VMM adapter to connect
 to OVM or other VMM adapters providers
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NodeManagerMBean Attribute=getAdapterName)
            
          
          
            
              Gets the node manager client adapter version when using a VMM adapter to connect
 to OVM or other VMM adapters providers
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NodeManagerMBean Attribute=getAdapterVersion)
            
          
          
            
              The Node Manager client user name used to connect to the underlying
 service to which the client delegates operations. 
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NodeManagerMBean Attribute=getPasswordEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Gets a list of the names and versions of the installed Virtual Machine Manager (VMM) adapters
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to BridgeDestinationMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.BridgeDestinationMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.BridgeDestinationMBean Attribute=getPropertiesAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to BridgeDestinationCommonMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.BridgeDestinationCommonMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The JNDI name of the adapter used to communicate with the
 specified destination.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The optional user name the adapter uses to access the
 bridge destination.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.BridgeDestinationCommonMBean Attribute=getUserPasswordEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The <tt>CLASSPATH</tt> of the bridge destination.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to TransactionLogStoreMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.TransactionLogStoreMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to PersistentStoreMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.PersistentStoreMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The name used by subsystems to refer to different stores on
 different servers using the same name.
            
          
          
            
              Overrides the name of the XAResource that this store registers
 with JTA.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to DeploymentMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DeploymentMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DeploymentMBean Attribute=getTargetsAsString)
            
          
          
            
              A priority that the server uses to determine when it deploys an
 item. The priority is relative to other deployable items of the
 same type.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ForeignJNDIProviderMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ForeignJNDIProviderMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The initial context factory to use to connect.
 This class name depends on the JNDI provider and the vendor
 you are using. The value corresponds to the standard JNDI property,
 <code>java.naming.factory.initial</code>.
            
          
          
            
              The foreign JNDI provider URL.
 This value corresponds to the
 standard JNDI property, <code>java.naming.provider.url</code>.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ForeignJNDIProviderMBean Attribute=getPasswordEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The remote server's user name.
            
          
          
            
              The foreign links.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ForeignJNDIProviderMBean Attribute=getPropertiesAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ForeignJNDILinkMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ForeignJNDILinkMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The local JNDI name.
            
          
          
            
              The foreign JNDI name.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WTCtBridgeGlobalMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WTCtBridgeGlobalMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Specifies whether this Tuxedo queuing bridge should use
 transactions when retrieving messages from a source location and
 when placing messages on a target location.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of timeout seconds for an entire redirection when
 this Tuxedo queuing bridge places a message on the target location.
 A value of <code>0</code> specifies an infinite wait.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of attempts to redirect a message before this Tuxedo
 queuing bridge places the message in the specified error location
 and logs an error.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The minimum number of milliseconds this Tuxedo queuing bridge
 waits before redirecting a message after a failure.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The name of the location used to store WebLogic Server JMS
 messages when a message cannot be redirected.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the Tuxedo queue used to store a message that cannot
 be redirected to a Tuxedo/Q source queue.
            
          
          
            
              The delivery mode to use when placing messages onto the target
 location.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The reply delivery mode to associate with a message when placing
 messages onto the target location.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The user identity for all messages handled by this Tuxedo
 queuing bridge for ACL checks when security is configured.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether non-standard data types are allowed to pass
 through this Tuxedo queuing bridge.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The name of the JNDI lookup factory.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the JMS connection factory.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the Tuxedo connection factory.
            
          
          
            
              The mapping of priorities from JMS to Tuxedo. The default JMS To
 Tux Priority Map is: <tt>0:1 | 1:12 | 2:23 | 3:34 | 4:45 |5:56 |
 6:67 | 7:78 | 8:89 | 9:100.</tt>
            
          
          
            
              The mapping of priorities to map from Tuxedo to JMS. The default
 JMS To Tux Priority Map is: <tt>1-10:0 | 11-20:1 | 21-30:2 |
 31-40:3| 41-50:4| 51-60:5 | 61-70:6 | 71-80:7 | 81-90:8 |
 91-100:9<code>.</code></tt>
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to MailSessionMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MailSessionMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MailSessionMBean Attribute=getPropertiesAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to RMCFactoryMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.RMCFactoryMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The JNDI Name associated with this resource.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CacheExpirationMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheExpirationMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The time after creation an entry is removed from the cache. TTL is
 measured in milliseconds
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheExpirationMBean Attribute=getTTL)
            
          
          
            
              The time after last access an entry becomes a target for eviction. Idle 
 time is measured in milliseconds.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheExpirationMBean Attribute=getIdleTime)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to LogMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogMBean Attribute=getLogFileFilterAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogMBean Attribute=getStdoutFilterAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The minimum severity of log messages going to the domain log from this server's log broadcaster.
 Messages with a lower severity than the specified value will not be published to the domain log.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogMBean Attribute=getDomainLogBroadcastSeverity)
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogMBean Attribute=getDomainLogBroadcastFilterAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The minimum severity of log messages going to the
 memory buffer of recent log events.
 Messages with a lower severity than the specified value will not be
 cached in the buffer.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogMBean Attribute=getMemoryBufferFilterAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The size of the memory buffer that holds the last n log records.
 This is used to support viewing the most recent log record entries 
 (tail viewing) from the WebLogic Administration Console.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the server logging is based on a Log4j
 implementation. By default, WebLogic logging uses an implementation
 based on the Java Logging APIs which are part of the JDK.
            
          
          
            
              When enabled, this redirects the stdout of the JVM in which a 
 WebLogic Server instance runs, to the WebLogic logging system.
 The stdout content is published to all the registered log destinations,
 like the server terminal console and log file.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogMBean Attribute=isRedirectStdoutToServerLogEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              When enabled, this redirects the stderr of the JVM in which a 
 WebLogic Server instance runs, to the WebLogic Logging system.
 The stderr content is published to all the registered log destinations,
 like the server terminal console and log file.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogMBean Attribute=isRedirectStderrToServerLogEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              Broadcasts log messages to the domain log in batch mode.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether application log messages are propagated to the parent node in the Logger tree or to the
 WebLogic Server log by means of the Logging Bridge. By default, this attribute is disabled, which results in 
 application log messages being propagated to the WebLogic Server log.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CommonLogMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CommonLogMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The minimum severity of log messages going to all
 log destinations. By default all messages are published.
 
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CommonLogMBean Attribute=getLoggerSeverityPropertiesAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The minimum severity of log messages going to the
 server log file. By default all messages go to the log file.
 
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The minimum severity of log messages going to the
 standard out. Messages with a lower severity than the specified
 value will not be published to standard out.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The output format to use when logging to the console.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether to dump stack traces to the console when
 included in logged message.
            
          
          
            
              Determines the no of stacktrace frames to display on standard out.
 All frames are displayed in the log file. 
 -1 means all frames are displayed.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to LogFileMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogFileMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The date format pattern used for rendering dates in the  log. 
 The DateFormatPattern string conforms to
 the specification of the <code>java.text.SimpleDateFormat</code> class.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The name of the file that stores current log messages. Usually it is a
 computed value based on the name of the parent of this MBean. For example,
 for a server log, it is <code><i>SERVER_NAME</i>.log</code>.
            
          
          
            
              Criteria for moving old log messages to a separate file.
 <ul>
 <li><code>NONE</code> Messages accumulate in a single file. 
 You must erase the contents of the file when the size is too large.
 Note that WebLogic Server sets a threshold size limit of 500 MB 
 before it forces a hard rotation to prevent excessive log file growth.

 <li><code>SIZE</code> When the log file reaches the size that you specify
 in <code>FileMinSize</code>, the server renames the file as
 <code><i>SERVER_NAME</i>.log<i>nnnnn</i></code>.

 <li><code>TIME</code> At each time interval that you specify in
 <code>TimeSpan</code>, the server renames the file as <code><i>SERVER_NAME</i>.log<i>nnnnn</i></code>.
 </ul>

 <p>After the server renames a file, subsequent messages accumulate
 in a new file with the name that you specified as the log file name.</p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogFileMBean Attribute=getRotationType)
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether to limit the number of log files that this server
 instance creates to store old messages. (Requires that you
 specify a file rotation type of <code>SIZE</code> or
 <code>TIME</code>.)
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of log files that the server creates when it
 rotates the log. This number does not include the file that the
 server uses to store current messages. (Requires that you enable
 Number of Files Limited.)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The interval (in hours) at which the server saves old log
 messages to another file. (Requires that you specify a file
 rotation type of <code>TIME</code>.)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Determines the start time (hour and minute) for a time-based rotation sequence.

 <p>At the time that this value specifies, the server renames the current log file.
 Thereafter, the server renames the log file at an interval that you
 specify in File Time Span.
            
          
          
            
              This factor is defined so that log rotation can be tested at a different frequency.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogFileMBean Attribute=getFileTimeSpanFactor)
            
          
          
            
              The size (1 - 65535 kilobytes) that triggers the server to move log
 messages to a separate file. The default is 500 kilobytes. After the log file reaches the specified 
 minimum size, the next time the server checks the file size, it will 
 rename the current log file as <code><i>SERVER_NAME</i>.log<i>nnnnn</i></code> and create 
 a new one to store subsequent messages. (Requires that you specify a 
 file rotation type of <code>Size</code>.)
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogFileMBean Attribute=getFileMinSize)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether a server rotates its log file during its
 startup cycle. The default value in production mode is false.
            
          
          
            
              The directory where the rotated log files will be stored.
 By default the rotated files are stored in the same directory
 where the log file is stored.
            
          
          
            
              Gets the underlying log buffer size in kilobytes
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogFileMBean Attribute=getBufferSizeKB)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CertRevocMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Determines whether certificate revocation checking is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Determines whether certificate path checking should fail, if
 revocation status could not be determined.
            
          
          
            
              Determines the certificate revocation checking method order.
            
          
          
            
              Determines whether a nonce is sent with OCSP requests, to force a
 fresh (not pre-signed) response.
            
          
          
            
              Determines whether the OCSP response local cache is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Determines the maximum number of entries supported by the OCSP
 response local cache. The minimum value is 1.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocMBean Attribute=getOcspResponseCacheCapacity)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Determines the refresh period for the OCSP response local cache,
 expressed as a percentage of the validity period of the response.
 <p>
 For example, for a validity period of 10 hours,
 a value of 10% specifies a refresh every 1 hour.
 <p>
 The validity period is determined by the OCSP response,
 and is calculated as the (next reported update time) - (this update time).
 <p>
 The valid range is 1 through 100.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocMBean Attribute=getOcspResponseCacheRefreshPeriodPercent)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Determines the timeout for the OCSP response, expressed in seconds.
 <p>
 The valid range is 1 thru 300 seconds.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocMBean Attribute=getOcspResponseTimeout)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Determines the time tolerance value for handling clock-skew differences
 between clients and responders, expressed in seconds.
 <p>
 The validity period of the response is extended
 both into the future and into the past by the specified amount of time,
 effectively widening the validity interval.
 <p>
 The value is &gt;=0 and &lt;=900. The maximum allowed tolerance is 15 minutes.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocMBean Attribute=getOcspTimeTolerance)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Determines the type of CRL cache, related to the physical storage
 of the CRLs.
 <p>
 The value specified in this attribute determines
</code> attributes apply.
 For example, if <code>CrlCacheType</code> is <code>ldap</code>,
 see related attributes like
 <code>{@link #getCrlCacheTypeLdapHostname}</code>.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocMBean Attribute=getCrlCacheType)
            
          
          
            
              Determines the remote hostname for the LDAP server containing CRLs.
 <p>
 This attribute applies when value
 <code>{@link CertRevocMBean#CRL_CACHE_TYPE_LDAP}</code> is returned from
 <code>{@link #getCrlCacheType}</code>.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocMBean Attribute=getCrlCacheTypeLdapHostname)
            
          
          
            
              Determines the remote port for the LDAP server containing CRLs.
 <p>
 This attribute applies when value
 <code>{@link CertRevocMBean#CRL_CACHE_TYPE_LDAP}</code> is returned from
 <code>{@link #getCrlCacheType}</code>.
 <p>
 The valid range is -1, 1 through 65535.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocMBean Attribute=getCrlCacheTypeLdapPort)
            
          
          
            
              Determines how long to wait for CRL search results from the LDAP server.
 <p>
 This attribute applies when value
 <code>{@link CertRevocMBean#CRL_CACHE_TYPE_LDAP}</code> is returned from
 <code>{@link #getCrlCacheType}</code>.
 <p>
 The valid range is 1 thru 300 seconds.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocMBean Attribute=getCrlCacheTypeLdapSearchTimeout)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Determines the refresh period for the CRL local cache,
 expressed as a percentage of the validity period of the CRL.
 <p>
 For example, for a validity period of 10 hours,
 a value of 10% specifies a refresh every 1 hour.
 <p>
 The validity period is determined by the CRL, and is
 calculated as the (next reported update time) - (this update time).
 <p>
 The valid range is 1 through 100.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocMBean Attribute=getCrlCacheRefreshPeriodPercent)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Determines whether the CRL Distribution Point
 processing to update the local CRL cache is enabled.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocMBean Attribute=isCrlDpEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              Determines the overall timeout for the Distribution Point CRL download,
 expressed in seconds.
 <p>
 The valid range is 1 thru 300 seconds.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocMBean Attribute=getCrlDpDownloadTimeout)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Determines whether the CRL Distribution Point background downloading,
 to automatically update the local CRL cache, is enabled.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocMBean Attribute=isCrlDpBackgroundDownloadEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              Returns the CertRevocCaMBeans representing the certificate
 authority overrides, which have been
 configured to be part of this certificate revocation checking configuration.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CertRevocCaMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocCaMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Determines the identity of this per-CA configuration using
 the distinguished name (defined in RFC 2253), which is
 used in certificates issued by the represented certificate
 authority.
 <p>
 For example:<br>
 &quot;CN=CertGenCAB, OU=FOR TESTING ONLY, O=MyOrganization, L=MyTown, ST=MyState, C=US&quot;
 <p>
 This will be used to match this configuration to issued
 certificates requiring revocation checking.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocCaMBean Attribute=getDistinguishedName)
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines whether certificate revocation checking is disabled.
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines whether certificate path checking should fail, if
 revocation status could not be determined.
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines the certificate revocation checking method order.
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines the OCSP responder URL to use as failover or override
 for the URL found in the certificate AIA. The usage is determined by
 <code>getOcspResponderUrlUsage</code>.
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines how <code>getOcspResponderUrl</code> is used:
 as failover in case the URL in the certificate AIA is invalid or not found,
 or as a value overriding the URL found in the certificate AIA.
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines whether the OCSP Explicit Trust model is
 enabled and how the trusted certificate is specified.
 <p>
 The valid values:<br/>
 <dl>
 <dt>"NONE"
 <dd>Explicit Trust is disabled
 <dt>“USE_SUBJECT”
 <dd>Identify the trusted certificate using the subject DN
 specified in the attribute <code>{@link #getOcspResponderCertSubjectName}</code>.
 <dt>“USE_ISSUER_SERIAL_NUMBER”
 <dd>Identify the trusted certificate using the issuer DN
 and certificate serial number specified in the attributes
 <code>{@link #getOcspResponderCertIssuerName}</code> and
 <code>{@link #getOcspResponderCertSerialNumber}</code>, respectively.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocCaMBean Attribute=getOcspResponderExplicitTrustMethod)
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines the explicitly trusted OCSP responder certificate
 subject name, when the attribute returned by
 <code>getOcspResponderExplicitTrustMethod</code> is “USE_SUBJECT”.
 <p>
 The subject name is formatted as a distinguished name per RFC 2253,
 for example "CN=CertGenCAB, OU=FOR TESTING ONLY, O=MyOrganization, L=MyTown, ST=MyState, C=US".
 <p>
 In cases where the subject name alone is not sufficient
 to uniquely identify the certificate, then both the
 <code>{@link #getOcspResponderCertIssuerName}</code> and
 <code>{@link #getOcspResponderCertSerialNumber}</code> may be used instead.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocCaMBean Attribute=getOcspResponderCertSubjectName)
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines the explicitly trusted OCSP responder certificate
 issuer name, when the attribute returned by
 <code>getOcspResponderExplicitTrustMethod</code> is “USE_ISSUER_SERIAL_NUMBER”.
 <p>
 The issuer name is formatted as a distinguished name per RFC 2253,
 for example "CN=CertGenCAB, OU=FOR TESTING ONLY, O=MyOrganization, L=MyTown, ST=MyState, C=US".
 <p>
 When <code>{@link #getOcspResponderCertIssuerName}</code>
 returns a non-null value then the
 <code>{@link #getOcspResponderCertSerialNumber}</code> must also be set.</p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocCaMBean Attribute=getOcspResponderCertIssuerName)
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines the explicitly trusted OCSP responder certificate
 serial number, when the attribute returned by
 <code>getOcspResponderExplicitTrustMethod</code> is “USE_ISSUER_SERIAL_NUMBER”.
 <p>
 The serial number is formatted as a hexidecimal string, with optional colon or space
 separators, for example "2A:FF:00".
 <p>
 When <code>{@link #getOcspResponderCertSerialNumber}</code>
 returns a non-null value then the
 <code>{@link #getOcspResponderCertIssuerName}</code> must also be set.</p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocCaMBean Attribute=getOcspResponderCertSerialNumber)
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines whether a nonce is sent with OCSP requests, to force a
 fresh (not pre-signed) response.
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines whether the OCSP response local cache is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines the timeout for the OCSP response, expressed in seconds.
 <p>
 The valid range is 1 thru 300 seconds.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocCaMBean Attribute=getOcspResponseTimeout)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines the time tolerance value for handling clock-skew differences
 between clients and responders, expressed in seconds.
 <p>
 The validity period of the response is extended
 both into the future and into the past by the specified amount of time,
 effectively widening the validity interval.
 <p>
 The value is &gt;=0 and &lt;=900. The maximum allowed tolerance is 15 minutes.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocCaMBean Attribute=getOcspTimeTolerance)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines whether the CRL Distribution Point
 processing to update the local CRL cache is enabled.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocCaMBean Attribute=isCrlDpEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines the overall timeout for the Distribution Point CRL download,
 expressed in seconds.
 <p>
 The valid range is 1 thru 300 seconds.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocCaMBean Attribute=getCrlDpDownloadTimeout)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines whether the CRL Distribution Point background downloading,
 to automatically update the local CRL cache, is enabled.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocCaMBean Attribute=isCrlDpBackgroundDownloadEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines the CRL Distribution Point URL to use as failover
 or override for the URL found in the CRLDistributionPoints
 extension in the certificate.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocCaMBean Attribute=getCrlDpUrl)
            
          
          
            
              For this CA, determines how <code>getCrlDpUrl</code> is used:
 as failover in case the URL in the certificate CRLDistributionPoints
 extension is invalid or not found, or as a value overriding the
 URL found in the certificate CRLDistributionPoints extension.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CertRevocCaMBean Attribute=getCrlDpUrlUsage)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to AuthConfigProviderMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.AuthConfigProviderMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSMessageLogFileMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSMessageLogFileMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to DataSourceLogFileMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DataSourceLogFileMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to GenericFileStoreMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.GenericFileStoreMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The path name to the file system directory where the file store
 maintains its data files.
            
          
          
            
              The disk write policy that determines how the file store writes data
 to disk.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The location of the cache directory for 
 <code>Direct-Write-With-Cache</code>, ignored for other policies.
            
          
          
            
              The minimum amount of data, in bytes and rounded down to the nearest power of 2, mapped into the 
 JVM's address space per primary store file. Applies to synchronous write policies <code>Direct-Write-With-Cache</code> 
 and <code>Disabled</code>, but only when a native <code>wlfileio</code> library is loaded. See
 <a href='#getMaxWindowBufferSize'>Maximum Window Buffer Size</a>.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum amount of data, in bytes and rounded down to the nearest power of 2,
 mapped into the JVM's address space per primary store file. Applies to synchronous write 
 policies <code>Direct-Write-With-Cache</code> and 
 <code>Disabled</code> but only when the native <code>wlfileio</code> library is loaded.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The I/O buffer size, in bytes, automatically rounded down to the nearest power of 2.
 <ul>
 <li> For the <code>Direct-Write-With-Cache</code> policy when a native
 <code>wlfileio</code> driver is available, <code>IOBufferSize</code> describes 
 the maximum portion of a cache view that is passed to a system call. This portion 
 does not consume off-heap (native) or Java heap memory.</li>

 <li> For the <code>Direct-Write</code> and <code>Cache-Flush</code> policies, 
 <code>IOBufferSize</code> is the size of a per store buffer which consumes 
 off-heap (native) memory, where one buffer is allocated during run-time, 
 but multiple buffers may be temporarily created during boot recovery.</li>

 <li>When a native <code>wlfileio</code> driver is not available, 
 the setting applies to off-heap (native) memory for all policies (including <code>Disabled</code>).</li>

 <li>For the best runtime performance, Oracle recommends setting 
 <code>IOBufferSize</code> so that it is larger than the largest 
 write (multiple concurrent store requests may be combined into a single write).</li>

 <li>For the best boot recovery time performance of large stores, 
 Oracle recommends setting <code>IOBufferSize</code> to at least 2 megabytes.</li>

 See <code>AllocatedIOBufferBytes</code> to find out the actual allocated 
 off-heap (native) memory amount. It is a multiple of <code>IOBufferSize</code> 
 for the <code>Direct-Write</code> and <code>Cache-Flush</code> policies, 
 or zero.</li>

 <li> See <a href='#AllocatedIOBufferBytes'>AllocatedIOBufferBytes</a>.
 </ul>
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum file size, in bytes.  
 <ul> 
 <li>The <code>MaxFileSize</code> value affects the number of files needed to accommodate 
 a store of a particular size (number of files = store size/MaxFileSize rounded up).</li>

 <li>A file store automatically reuses space freed by deleted records and automatically 
  expands individual files up to <code>MaxFileSize</code> if there is not enough space for a new 
 record. If there is no space left in exiting files for a new record, a store creates an additional file.</li>

 <li> A small number of larger files is normally preferred over a large number of smaller files 
 as each file allocates Window Buffer and file handles. </li>

 <code>BlockSize</code>, then <code>MaxFileSize</code> is 
 <code>BlockSize</code>. The default <code>BlockSize</code> is 512, 
 512 is 8 GB. </li>

 <li> See <a href='#getInitialSize'>Initial Size</a>.</li>
 </ul>
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The smallest addressable block, in bytes, of a file.
 When a native <code>wlfileio</code> driver is available
 and the block size has not been configured by the user,
 the store selects the minimum OS specific value for unbuffered
  (direct) I/O, if it is within the range [512, 8192].
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The initial file size, in bytes. 
 <ul>
 <li>Set <code>InitialSize</code> to pre-allocate 
 file space during a file store boot. If <code>InitialSize</code> exceeds <code>MaxFileSize</code>, 
 a store creates multiple files (number of files = <code>InitialSize</code>/<code>MaxFileSize</code> rounded up).</li>

 <li>A file store automatically reuses the space from deleted records and automatically expands a file if there is not enough space for a new write request.</li>

 <li>Use <code>InitialSize</code> to limit or prevent file expansions 
 during runtime, as file expansion introduces temporary latencies that may be noticeable 
 under rare circumstances. </li>
 <li>Changes to initial size only take effect for new file stores, or after any current files have been deleted prior to restart.</li>

 <li> See <a href='#getMaxFileSize'>Maximum File Size</a>.
 </ul>
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Determines whether OS file locking is used. 
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMXMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMXMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Specifies whether each server instance in the domain initializes
 its Runtime MBean Server, which provides access to a server's
 run-time MBeans and read-only configuration MBeans.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Administration Server initializes the
 Domain MBean Server, which provides federated access to all run-time
 MBeans and read-only configuration MBeans in the domain. Through
 it, JMX clients can access all MBeans in a domain through a single
 connection.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Administration Server initializes the Edit
 MBean Server, which contains the hierarchy of MBeans used to make
 modifications to the domain's configuration. All JMX clients,
 including utilities such as the Administration Console and the
 WebLogic Scripting Tool, use the Edit MBean Server to modify a
 domain's configuration.
            
          
          
            
              Enables JMX clients to use the deprecated <code>MBeanHome</code>
 interface.
            
          
          
            
              Enables access to the Management EJB (MEJB), which is part of
 the J2EE Management APIs (JSR-77). 
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether each server instance initializes the JDK's
 platform MBean server. Enabling it, along with <code>isPlatformMBeanServerUsed</code>,
 causes WebLogic Server to use the platform MBean server as its Runtime MBean Server.
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds that internal WebLogic Server processes wait to 
 connect to an MBean server, invoke an MBean server method, and return the 
 results of the invocation. If the MBean server method does not complete 
 (return) within the timeout period, WebLogic Server abandons its invocation
 attempt.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether WebLogic Server will use
 the platform MBean server for its Runtime MBean Server. Previously,
 WebLogic Server used the platform MBean server by default if it was enabled.
 This attribute provides a separation between enabling the platform MBean server 
 and using it for WebLogic Server MBeans.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to MessagingBridgeMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MessagingBridgeMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MessagingBridgeMBean Attribute=getSourceDestinationAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MessagingBridgeMBean Attribute=getTargetDestinationAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The filter for messages that are sent across the messaging
 bridge instance.
            
          
          
            
              The QOS (quality of service) for this messaging bridge
 instance.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies if this messaging bridge instance allows the
 degradation of its QOS (quality of service) when the configured QOS
 is not available.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether or not the messaging bridge allows durable
 messages.
            
          
          
            
              The minimum amount of time, in seconds, that a messaging bridge
 instance waits before it tries to reconnect to the source or target
 destination after a failure.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The incremental delay time, in seconds, that a messaging bridge
 instance increases its waiting time between one failed reconnection
 attempt and the next retry.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The longest time, in seconds, that a messaging bridge instance
 waits between one failed attempt to connect to the source or
 target, and the next retry.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum amount of time, in seconds, that a messaging bridge
 instance remains idle.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The amount of time, in seconds, that the transaction manager
 waits for each transaction before timing it out.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies if a messaging bridge instance forwards in
 asynchronous messaging mode.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the initial operating state of a targeted messaging
 bridge instance.
            
          
          
            
              The number of messages that are processed within one
 transaction.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum amount of time, in milliseconds, that a messaging
 bridge instance waits before sending a batch of messages in one
 transaction, regardless of whether the <code>Batch Size</code> has
 been reached or not.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies if message properties are preserved when messages are
 forwarded by a bridge instance.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to LogFilterMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogFilterMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogFilterMBean Attribute=getSeverityLevel)
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogFilterMBean Attribute=getSubsystemNames)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LogFilterMBean Attribute=getUserIds)
            
          
          
            
              The filter expression to be evaluated for qualifying log messages.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JDBCConnectionPoolMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JDBCConnectionPoolMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WTCRemoteTuxDomMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WTCRemoteTuxDomMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The unique name used to identify this remote Tuxedo access
 point. This name should be unique for all local and remote Tuxedo
 access points defined within a WTC Service. This allows you to
 define unique configurations having the same Access Point ID.
            
          
          
            
              The connection principal name used to identify this remote
 Tuxedo access point when attempting to establish a session
 connection to local Tuxedo access points.
            
          
          
            
              The conditions under which this remote Tuxedo access point
 establishes a session connection with a local Tuxedo access
 point.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The inbound access control list (ACL) policy toward requests
 from a remote Tuxedo access point.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The outbound access control list (ACL) policy toward requests to
 a remote Tuxedo access point.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The full path to the user password file containing UID/GID
 information. (This field is only relevant if you specify
 <code>TpUsrFile</code> as the AppKey Generator.)
            
          
          
            
              The local domain name from which this remote Tuxedo domain is
 reached.
            
          
          
            
              The principal name used to verify the identity of this remote
 Tuxedo access point when it establishes a session connection with a
 local Tuxedo access point. If not specified, the connection
 principal name defaults to the AccessPointID for this access
 point.
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds that this remote Tuxedo access point waits
 between automatic connection attempts to local Tuxedo access
 points. Use this only when the ConnectionPolicy value is set to
 <code>ON_STARTUP</code>.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of times that this remote Tuxedo access point
 tries to establish a session connections to local Tuxedo access
 points. Use only when the ConnectionPolicy value is set to
 <code>ON_STARTUP</code>.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The network address and port number of this remote Tuxedo access
 point.
            
          
          
            
              The URL for a foreign name service that is federated into
 JNDI.
            
          
          
            
              The context at which this remote Tuxedo access point federates
 to a foreign name service. If omitted, the default federation point
 is <code>tuxedo.domains</code>.
            
          
          
            
              The compression threshold this remote Tuxedo access point uses
 when sending data to a local Tuxedo access point. Application
 buffers larger than this size are compressed.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The minimum encryption key length (in bits) this remote Tuxedo
 access point uses when establishing a session connection. A value
 of <code>0</code> indicates no encryption is used.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum encryption key length (in bits) this remote Tuxedo
 access point uses when establishing a session connection. A value
 of <code>0</code> indicates no encryption is used.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the type of AppKey plug-in used.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the anonymous user is allowed to access remote
 Tuxedo services.
            
          
          
            
              The default <code>AppKey</code> value to be used by the anonymous
 user and other users who are not defined in the user database if
 the plug-in allows them to access Tuxedo.
            
          
          
            
              The keyword for Tuxedo UID (User ID) used in the
 <code>WlsUser</code> when using the Tuxedo migration utility
 <code>tpmigldap</code>. This keyword is only relevant if you
 specify <code>LDAP</code> as the AppKey Generator.)
            
          
          
            
              The keyword for Tuxedo GID (Group ID) used in the
 <code>WlsUser</code> when using the Tuxedo migration utility
 <code>tpmigldap</code>. This field is only relevant if you specify
 <code>LDAP</code> as the AppKey Generator.)
            
          
          
            
              The full pathname to the custom <code>AppKey</code> generator class.
 (This class is only relevant if you specify <code>Custom</code> as the
 AppKey Generator.)
            
          
          
            
              The optional parameters to be used by the custom <code>AppKey</code>
 class at the class initialization time. This class is only
 relevant if you specify <code>Custom</code> as the AppKey
 Generator.)
            
          
          
            
              Return value tells whether this local Tuxedo access point 
 is configured with Application Level Keep Alive, and it maximum idle
 time value before wait timer start ticking.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Return value that tells whether this local Tuxedo access point 
 requires the acknowledgement of Application Level Keep Alive,
 and how long it will wait without receiving acknowledgement before
 declare the connection is inaccessible.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WLDFDataRetirementMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WLDFDataRetirementMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Enable data retirement
            
          
          
            
              Name of the archive for which data retirement is configured
            
          
          
            
              This attribute specifies the hour of day at which the data 
 retirement task will first run during the day.
            
          
          
            
              This attribute specifies the period in hours at which the data 
 retirement task will be periodically performed for the archive 
 during the day after it is first executed. The value of this attribute
 must be positive
 
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to MaxThreadsConstraintMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MaxThreadsConstraintMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Maximum number of concurrent threads that can execute requests sharing this
 constraint.
 <p>
 A count of 0 or -1 is treated as if the constraint is not present. This
 means that no constraint is enforced for these two values. A count > 0 can
 be dynamically changed to 0 to indicate that constraint enforcement is no
 longer needed.
 </p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MaxThreadsConstraintMBean Attribute=getCount)
            
          
          
            
              Name of the connection pool whose size is taken as the max constraint.
 <p>
 This can be the name of a JDBC data source. The max capacity of the
 data source is used as the constraint.
 </p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MaxThreadsConstraintMBean Attribute=getConnectionPoolName)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSSAFMessageLogFileMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSSAFMessageLogFileMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JPAMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JPAMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The configured default JPA provider for the domain.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ContextCaseMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ContextCaseMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The name of the user whose requests are to be processed 
 by the request class with the name specified in RequestClassName.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the user group whose requests are to be processed 
 by the request class with the name specified in RequestClassName.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the request class to be used for processing 
  requests for the specified user and/or group.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SecurityMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityMBean Attribute=getRealmAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The name of the Java class that implements a 6.x Auditing provider. The Auditing
 provider must be an implementation of the <tt>weblogic.security.audit.AuditProvider</tt>
 interface. This interface is only available in Compatibility mode.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityMBean Attribute=getAuditProviderClassName)
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether guest logins can be used to access WebLogic
 resources in this WebLogic Server domain.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the <tt>system</tt> user. This attribute must be
 specified.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether this WebLogic Server domain should log all
 security checks.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityMBean Attribute=getPasswordPolicyAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether migration from a WebLogic Server 6.x security
 configuration is enabled.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to FederationServicesMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.FederationServicesMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Indicates whether the Source Site is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              The URL for the Source Site.
            
          
          
            
              The Intersite Transfer URIs.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Intersite Transfer Service requires SSL.
            
          
          
            
              One or more URIs on which to listen
  for incoming assertion retrieval requests.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Assertion Retrieval Service requires SSL.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Assertion Retrieval Service requires two-way SSL authentication.
            
          
          
            
              The class that provides persistent storage for assertions, if you use an Assertion Store class other than the default class.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.FederationServicesMBean Attribute=getAssertionStorePropertiesAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The alias used to store and retrieve the Source Site's signing key
 in the keystore. This key is used to sign POST profile responses.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.FederationServicesMBean Attribute=getSigningKeyPassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Destination Site is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              The Assertion Consumer URIs.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Assertion Consumer Service requires SSL.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the POST recipient check is enabled. When true, the recipient of
  the SAML Response must match the URL in the HTTP Request.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the POST one-use check is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              The class used as the persistent store for the Used Assertion Cache.  
 When no class is specified, the default Used Assertion Cache implementation
  is used.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.FederationServicesMBean Attribute=getUsedAssertionCachePropertiesAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The alias used to store and retrieve the Destination Site's SSL client identity
 in the keystore.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.FederationServicesMBean Attribute=getSSLClientIdentityPassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JASPICMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JASPICMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Returns true if JASPIC is enabled, false otherwise.
            
          
          
            
              get the entire list of auth config providers
 that are configured for the WLS factory
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JASPICMBean Attribute=getAuthConfigProviders)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SNMPLogFilterMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SNMPLogFilterMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The minimum severity of a message that causes a WebLogic Server SNMP agent to
 generate a notification.
            
          
          
            
              A list of subsystems whose messages are selected by this log
 filter. If none are specified, messages from all subsystems are
 selected.
            
          
          
            
              A list of user IDs that causes a WebLogic Server SNMP agent to generate a
 notification.
            
          
          
            
              A list of message IDs or ID ranges that cause a WebLogic Server SNMP agent to
 generate a notification.
            
          
          
            
              A string that is searched for in the message text. Only messages
 that contain the string are selected. If a string is not specified,
 all messages are selected.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SNMPTrapSourceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SNMPTrapSourceMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SNMPTrapSourceMBean Attribute=getEnabledServersAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to DebugScopeMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DebugScopeMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Gets the enabled state of the debug scope mbean.
 By default a debug scope is disabled.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DebugScopeMBean Attribute=isEnabled)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SNMPTrapDestinationMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SNMPTrapDestinationMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The DNS name or IP address of the computer on which the SNMP
 manager is running.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The UDP port on which the SNMP manager is listening.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The password (community name) that a WebLogic Server SNMP agent
 sends to the SNMP manager when the agent generates SNMPv1 or SNMPv2
 notifications.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the user name that the WebLogic Server SNMP agent encodes
 into SNMPv3 responses or notifications. Requires you to create a credential map
 for this user name in the WebLogic Server security realm.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the security protocols that the SNMP agent uses when sending
 SNMPv3 responses or notifications to the SNMP manager that this trap 
 destination represents. Requires you to specify a security name for this
 trap destination.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to AuthModuleMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.AuthModuleMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              get the classname for the authentication module
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.AuthModuleMBean Attribute=getClassName)
            
          
          
            
              get the module type - that is: Client or Server
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.AuthModuleMBean Attribute=getModuleType)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.AuthModuleMBean Attribute=getPropertiesAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to RDBMSRealmMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.RDBMSRealmMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The Java class name for the database driver used with the RDBMS
 security realm.
            
          
          
            
              The location of the database.
            
          
          
            
              The user name used to login into the database.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.RDBMSRealmMBean Attribute=getDatabasePasswordEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.RDBMSRealmMBean Attribute=getSchemaPropertiesAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to BasicRealmMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.BasicRealmMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Gets the realmClassName attribute of the BasicRealmMBean
 object
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ConfigurationExtensionMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ConfigurationExtensionMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The name of the file that contains the module. By default the file resides in
 the DOMAIN_DIR/config directory.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WLECConnectionPoolMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WLECConnectionPoolMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to StartupClassMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.StartupClassMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Specifies whether a failure in this startup class prevents the
 targeted server(s) from starting.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the targeted servers load and run this startup
 class before activating JMS and JDBC services and before starting
 deployment for applications and EJBs.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the targeted servers load and run this startup
 class after activating JMS and JDBC services and before activating
 applications and EJBs.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the targeted servers load and run this startup
 class after applications and EJBs are running.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ClassDeploymentMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClassDeploymentMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The fully qualified name of a class to load and run. The class
 must be on the server's classpath.
            
          
          
            
              Arguments that a server uses to initialize a class.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SNMPAttributeChangeMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SNMPAttributeChangeMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The MBean type that defines the attribute you want to monitor.
 Do not include the <code>MBean</code> suffix. For example, specify
 <code>Server</code> to monitor a ServerMBean.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The name of the MBean instance that you want to monitor. If you
 leave the name undefined, WebLogic Server monitors all instances of
 the MBean type that you specify in Monitored MBean Type.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the attribute that you want to monitor. This
 attribute must be in the WebLogic Server MIB.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WTCLocalTuxDomMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WTCLocalTuxDomMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The unique name used to identify this local Tuxedo access point.
 This name should be unique for all local and remote Tuxedo access
 points defined within a WTC Service. This allows you to define
 unique configurations having the same Access Point ID.
            
          
          
            
              The connection principal name used to identify this local Tuxedo
 access point when attempting to establish a session connection with
 remote Tuxedo access points.
            
          
          
            
              The type of application security enforced.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The conditions under which this local Tuxedo access point
 establishes a session connection with a remote Tuxedo access
 point.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The principal name used to verify the identity of this domain
 when establishing a connection to another domain.
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds that this local Tuxedo access point waits
 between automatic connection attempts to remote Tuxedo access
 points. Use this value only when Connection Policy is set to
 <code>ON_STARTUP</code>.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of times that this local Tuxedo access point
 tries to establish a session connection to remote Tuxedo access
 points. Use this value only when Connection Policy is set to
 <code>ON_STARTUP</code>.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds this local Tuxedo access point
 allows for a blocking call.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The network address and port number of this local Tuxedo access
 point.
            
          
          
            
              The compression threshold this local Tuxedo access point uses
 when sending data to a remote Tuxedo access point. Application
 buffers larger than this size are compressed.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The minimum encryption key length (in bits) this local Tuxedo
 access point uses when establishing a session connection. A value
 of <code>0</code> indicates no encryption is used.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum encryption key length (in bits) this local Tuxedo
 access point uses when establishing a session connection. A value
 of <code>0</code> indicates no encryption is used.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this local Tuxedo access point interoperates
 with remote Tuxedo access points that are based upon Tuxedo release
 6.5. If this value is set to <code>Yes</code>, the local Tuxedo access
 point interoperates with a Tuxedo 6.5 domain.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Return value tells whether this local Tuxedo access point 
 is configured with Application Level Keep Alive, and it maximum idle
 time value before wait timer start ticking.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Return value that tells whether this local Tuxedo access point 
 requires the acknowledgement of Application Level Keep Alive,
 and how long it will wait without receiving acknowledgement before
 declare the connection is inaccessible.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies if the connection initiated or accepted
 by this Local Tuxedo access point uses SSL on top of its transport layer. Values are:
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Provides the configuration rule to be used for 
 finding Local Access Point's identity key store and trust key store. 
 In plain text, it contains information on where the identity key store
 and trust key store are configured.  When KeyStoreLocation is configured 
 with <code>WLS Store</code>, WTC uses configuration information from the WLS 
 Key Stores configuration.  Otherwise, it uses the key stores 
 information configured in the Local Access Point.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The path and file name of the identity keystore.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WTCLocalTuxDomMBean Attribute=getIdentityKeyStorePassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The string alias used to store and retrieve the Local Tuxedo access point's
 private key in the keystore. This private key is associated with the
 Local Tuxedo access point's digital certificate.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WTCLocalTuxDomMBean Attribute=getPrivateKeyPassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The path and file name of the trust keystore.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WTCLocalTuxDomMBean Attribute=getTrustKeyStorePassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WTCPasswordMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WTCPasswordMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The name of the local access point to which this password
 applies.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the remote access point to which this password
 applies.
            
          
          
            
              The initialization vector used to encrypt the local
 password.
            
          
          
            
              The local password used to authenticate connections between the
 local access point and the remote access point.
            
          
          
            
              The initialization vector used to encrypt the remote
 password.
            
          
          
            
              The remote password used to authenticate connections between the
 local access point and remote access point.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebserviceSecurityTokenMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebserviceSecurityTokenMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebserviceSecurityConfigurationMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebserviceSecurityConfigurationMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The fully qualified name of the class that implements a particular
 credential provider or token handler.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the type of token used for the particular credential 
 provider or token handler.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the list of properties that are associated with this
 credential provider or token handler.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ConfigurationPropertyMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ConfigurationPropertyMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Specifies whether the property should be encrypted.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the value of the property.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ConfigurationPropertyMBean Attribute=getEncryptedValueEncryptedAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CoherenceServerStartMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CoherenceServerStartMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ManagedExternalServerStartMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ManagedExternalServerStartMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The Java Vendor value to use when starting this server;
 for example, <code>BEA, Sun, HP etc </code>. 
            
          
          
            
              The Java home directory (path on the machine running Node
 Manager) to use when starting this server.
            
          
          
            
              The classpath (path on the machine running Node Manager) to use
 when starting this server.
            
          
          
            
              The BEA home directory (path on the machine running Node
 Manager) to use when starting this server.
            
          
          
            
              The directory that this server uses as its root directory. This
 directory must be on the computer that hosts the Node Manager. If
 you do not specify a Root Directory value, the domain directory
 is used by default.
 
            
          
          
            
              The arguments to use when starting this server.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSDistributedQueueMemberMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSDistributedQueueMemberMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSDistributedQueueMemberMBean Attribute=getJMSQueueAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSDistributedDestinationMemberMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSDistributedDestinationMemberMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The weight of a distributed destination member is a measure of
 its ability to handle message load, with respect to the other
 member destinations in the same distributed set.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to OverloadProtectionMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.OverloadProtectionMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Total number of requests that can be present in the server. This includes
 requests that are enqueued and those under execution.
 <p>
 The server performs a differentiated denial of service on reaching the
 shared capacity. A request with higher priority will be accepted in place 
 of a lower priority request already in the queue. The lower priority 
 request is kept waiting in the queue till all high priority requests are 
 executed. Further enqueues of the low priority requests are rejected right 
 away. 
 </p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.OverloadProtectionMBean Attribute=getSharedCapacityForWorkManagers)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Exit the server process when the kernel encounters a panic condition like 
 an unhandled OOME. An unhandled OOME could lead to inconsistent state and a 
 server restart is advisable if backed by node manager or a HA agent.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.OverloadProtectionMBean Attribute=getPanicAction)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Enable automatic forceshutdown of the server on failed state.  
 The server self-health monitoring detects fatal failures and mark the 
 server as failed. The server can be restarted using NodeManager or a 
 HA agent.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.OverloadProtectionMBean Attribute=getFailureAction)
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Percentage free memory after which the server overload condition is cleared.
 WorkManagers stop performing overloadActions and start regular execution
 once the overload condition is cleared.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.OverloadProtectionMBean Attribute=getFreeMemoryPercentHighThreshold)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Percentage free memory below which the server is considered overloaded.
 WorkManagers perform overloadAction once the server is marked as overloaded.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.OverloadProtectionMBean Attribute=getFreeMemoryPercentLowThreshold)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Configure a trigger that marks the server as failed when the condition 
 is met. A failed server in turn can be configured to shutdown or go into
 admin state.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.OverloadProtectionMBean Attribute=getServerFailureTrigger)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ServerFailureTriggerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerFailureTriggerMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The number of seconds that a thread must be continually working
 before this server diagnoses the thread as being stuck.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of stuck threads after which the server is transitioned into
 FAILED state. There are options in OverloadProtectionMBean to suspend and
 shutdown a FAILED server. By default, the server continues to run in 
 FAILED state.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebServerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServerMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Returns the Log settings for the WebServer/VirtualHost.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServerMBean Attribute=getWebServerLog)
            
          
          
            
              The name of the host to which all redirected URLs will be sent.
 If specified, WebLogic Server will use this value rather than the
 one in the HOST header.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the HTTP port to which all redirected URLs will be
 sent. If specified, WebLogic Server will use this value rather than
 the one in the HOST header.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the secure HTTP port to which all redirected URLs
 will be sent. If specified, WebLogic Server will use this value
 rather than the one in the HOST header.
            
          
          
            
              Get the response code to be used when an application is overloaded. An 
 application can get overloaded when the number of pending requests has
 reached the max capacity specified in the WorkManager or when the server
 is low on memory. The low memory condition is determined using 
 {@link OverloadProtectionMBean#getFreeMemoryPercentLowThreshold()}.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServerMBean Attribute=getOverloadResponseCode)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether there should be a persistent connection to
 this server. (This may improve the performance of your Web
 applications.)
            
          
          
            
              The amount of time this server waits before closing an 
 inactive HTTP connection.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The amount of time this server waits before closing an 
 inactive HTTPS connection.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Timeout (in seconds) for reading HTTP POST data in a servlet request.
 If the POST data is chunked, the amount of time the server waits between
 the end of receiving the last chunk of data and the end of receiving the
 next chunk of data in an HTTP POST before it times out.
 (This is used to prevent denial-of-service attacks that attempt to overload the server with POST data.)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Max Post Time (in seconds) for reading HTTP POST data in a
 servlet request. MaxPostTime &lt; 0 means unlimited
            
          
          
            
              The maximum post size this server allows for reading HTTP POST
 data in a servlet request, excluding chunked HTTP requests 
 (Transfer-Encoding: chunked).
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether this server name is sent with the HTTP
 response. (This is useful for wireless applications where there is
 limited space for headers.)
            
          
          
            
              Returns the original context-root for the default Web application
 for this Web server. Alternatively, you can use the context-root 
 attributes in application.xml or weblogic.xml to set a default Web 
 application. The context-root for a default Web application is /. If 
 "" (empty string) is specified, the Web server defaults to /.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServerMBean Attribute=getCharsetsAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServerMBean Attribute=getURLResourceAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether the use of Chunk Transfer-Encoding in HTTP/1.1
 is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Enables use of the highest compatible HTTP protocol
 version-string in the response. E.g. HTTP spec suggests that
 HTTP/1.1 version-string should be used in response to a request
 using HTTP/1.0. This does not necessarily affect the response
 format.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServerMBean Attribute=isUseHeaderEncoding)
            
          
          
            
              Whether authcookie feature is enabled or not.
            
          
          
            
              The default size of the blocks to be written to the network
 layer.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether the session ID should include JVM information.
 (Checking this box may be necessary when using URL rewriting with
 WAP devices that limit the size of the URL to 128 characters, and
 may also affect the use of replicated sessions in a cluster.)
 When this box is selected,
 the default size of the URL will be set at 52 characters, and it 
 will not contain any special characters.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether this server allows the inclusion of the
 context path in the virtual path to <tt>context.getRealPath()</tt>.
 (If checked, you cannot use sub directories with the same name as
 <tt>contextPath</tt>). This is a compatibility switch that will be
 deprecated 9.0.0.0 in future releases.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether the singleSignonDisabled attribute is
 enabled
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServerMBean Attribute=getWebDeploymentsAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Set the WorkManager name that will be used to execute servlet requests
 that need their session retrieved from a remote server since the current
 server is neither the primary nor the secondary for the request. This can
 happen if request stickness is lost for example due to hardware LB
 configuration issues. Creating a dedicated WorkManager with a max threads
 constraint ensures that threads are available to service requests for which
 the current server is the primary.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServerMBean Attribute=getWorkManagerForRemoteSessionFetching)
            
          
          
            
              Get the Client IP Header from WebSerevrMBean.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServerMBean Attribute=getClientIpHeader)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebServerLogMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServerLogMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Indicates whether this server logs HTTP requests. (The remaining
 fields on this page are relevant only if you select this check box.)
            
          
          
            
              Returns the list of fields specified for the <code>extended</code>
 logging format for access.log. 
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The format of the HTTP log file. Both formats are defined by the
 W3C. With the extended log format, you use server
 directives in the log file to customize the information that the
 server records.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the time stamps for HTTP log messages are in
 Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) regardless of the local time zone that
 the host computer specifies.
            
          
          
            
               Specifies if HTTP log messages should contain MilliSeconds.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WTCExportMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WTCExportMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The name used to identify an exported service.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the local access point that exports this
 service.
            
          
          
            
              The complete name of the EJB home interface to use when invoking
 a service.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WTCExportMBean Attribute=getTargetClass)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WTCExportMBean Attribute=getTargetJar)
            
          
          
            
              The remote name of this service. 
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to GenericJDBCStoreMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.GenericJDBCStoreMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The prefix for the JDBC store's database table
 (<code>WLStore</code>), in the following format:
 <code>[[[catalog.]schema.]prefix]</code>.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the DDL (Data Definition Language) file to use for
 creating the JDBC store's backing table.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSSystemResourceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSSystemResourceMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SystemResourceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SystemResourceMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The name of the file that contains the module. By default the file resides in
 the DOMAIN_DIR/config directory.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to BasicDeploymentMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.BasicDeploymentMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The path to the source of the deployment unit on admin server.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.BasicDeploymentMBean Attribute=getSourcePath)
            
          
          
            
              Targeting for subcomponents that differs from targeting for the
 component.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.BasicDeploymentMBean Attribute=getSubDeployments)
            
          
          
            
              <p>An integer value that indicates when this unit
 is deployed, relative to other deployable units on a server, 
 during startup.
 <p>
 Units with lower values are deployed before those with
 higher values.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.BasicDeploymentMBean Attribute=getDeploymentOrder)
            
          
          
            
              <p>A string value that indicates what principal should be used 
 when deploying the file or archive during startup and shutdown. 
 This principal will be used to set the current subject when calling out 
 into application code for interfaces such as ApplicationLifecycleListener. 
 If no principal name is specified, then the anonymous principal will be used.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.BasicDeploymentMBean Attribute=getDeploymentPrincipalName)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to TargetInfoMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.TargetInfoMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.TargetInfoMBean Attribute=getTargetsAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The values match those defined by jsr88. This attribute may move to another MBean.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.TargetInfoMBean Attribute=getModuleType)
            
          
          
            
              
 This is only set for beans created as a result of conversion from an
 8.1 application configured using ApplicationMBean and ComponentMBean.
 
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SubDeploymentMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SubDeploymentMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The subdeployment groups within this JMS module. Subdeployments enable 
 you to deploy some resources in a JMS module to a JMS server and other 
 JMS resources to a server instance or cluster.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebServiceBufferingMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceBufferingMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Configuration for the request buffering queue
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceBufferingMBean Attribute=getWebServiceRequestBufferingQueue)
            
          
          
            
              Configuration for the response buffering queue
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceBufferingMBean Attribute=getWebServiceResponseBufferingQueue)
            
          
          
            
              The number of times a buffered request or response can be retried before
 it is abandoned (and moved to any error queue defined for the buffer queue)
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceBufferingMBean Attribute=getRetryCount)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The amount time between retries of a buffered request and response. Note,
 this value is only applicable when RetryCount > 0. String value in
 ‘Duration’ format. Defaults to ‘P0DT30S (30 seconds).
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceBufferingMBean Attribute=getRetryDelay)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebServiceRequestBufferingQueueMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceRequestBufferingQueueMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebServiceBufferingQueueMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceBufferingQueueMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              A boolean flag indicating whether buffering is enabled (request buffering
 if this is the request queue, or response buffering if this is the
 response queue). Defaults to false.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceBufferingQueueMBean Attribute=isEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              The JNDI name of the connection factory to use when buffering messages
 onto this queue. Defaults to the 'default' JMS connection factory.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceBufferingQueueMBean Attribute=getConnectionFactoryJndiName)
            
          
          
            
              A boolean flag indicating whether transactions should be used when
 buffering a message onto or consuming a message off of this queue. Defaults
 to false.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceBufferingQueueMBean Attribute=isTransactionEnabled)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebServiceResponseBufferingQueueMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceResponseBufferingQueueMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSDistributedQueueMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSDistributedQueueMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSDistributedDestinationMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSDistributedDestinationMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSVirtualDestinationMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSVirtualDestinationMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSQueueMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSQueueMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSDestinationMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSDestinationMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSDestCommonMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSDestCommonMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WLDFServerDiagnosticMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WLDFServerDiagnosticMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The default directory where the server stores captured
 diagnostic images.
            
          
          
            
              The default timeout period, in minutes, that the server uses to
 delay future diagnostic image-capture requests.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The time span, in milliseconds, for which recently
 archived events will be captured in the diagnostic image. All
 events archived on or after
 ( <code>System.currentTimeMillis() - interval</code> )
 will be captured.
            
          
          
            
              The directory in which the current server maintains its
 diagnostic store.
            
          
          
            
              Determines whether OS file locking is used. 
            
          
          
            
              The minimum amount of data, in bytes and rounded down to the nearest power of 2, mapped into the 
 JVM's address space per diagnostic store file.
 Applies only when a native <code>wlfileio</code> library is loaded.
 See 
 <a href='#getDiagnosticStoreMinWindowBufferSize'>Diagnostic Store Maximum Window Buffer Size</a>.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum amount of data, in bytes and rounded down to the nearest power of 2,
 mapped into the JVM's address space per diagnostic store file. 
 Applies only when a native <code>wlfileio</code> library is loaded.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The I/O buffer size, in bytes, automatically rounded down to the nearest power of 2, controls the largest write size.
 <ul>
 <li>When a native <code>wlfileio</code> driver is available, the setting applies to off-heap (native) memory.</li>
 <li>When a native <code>wlfileio</code> driver is not available, 
 the setting applies to JAVA heap memory.</li>
 <li>For the best runtime performance, Oracle recommends setting 
 <code>DiagnosticStoreIOBufferSize</code> so that it is larger than the largest 
 write (multiple concurrent store requests may be combined into a single write).</li>

 <li>See <code>AllocatedIOBufferBytes</code> to find out the actual allocated 
 off-heap (native) memory amount. It is a multiple of <code>IOBufferSize</code></li>

 </ul>
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum file size, in bytes.  
 <ul> 
 <li>The <code>DiagnosticStoreMaxFileSize</code> value affects the number of files needed to accommodate 
 a diagnostic store of a particular size (number of files = diagnostic store size/MaxFileSize rounded up).</li>

 <li>A diagnostic store automatically reuses space freed by deleted records and automatically 
  expands individual files up to <code>DiagnosticStoreMaxFileSize</code> if there is not enough space for a new 
 record. If there is no space left in exiting files for a new record, a diagnostic store creates an additional file.</li>

 <li> A small number of larger files is normally preferred over a large number of smaller files 
 as each file allocates Window Buffer and file handles. </li>

 <code>DiagnosticStoreBlockSize</code>, then <code>DiagnosticStoreMaxFileSize</code> is 
 <code>DiagnosticStoreBlockSize</code>. The default <code>DiagnosticStoreBlockSize</code> is 512, 
 512 is 8 GB. </li>
 </ul>
 Oracle recommends not setting the Diagnostic Store Max File Size above the default value of 1,342,177,280.  
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The smallest addressable block, in bytes, of a file.
 When a native <code>wlfileio</code> driver is available
 and the block size has not been configured by the user,
 the store selects the minimum OS specific value for unbuffered
  (direct) I/O, if it is within the range [512, 8192].
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Determines whether the current server persists its harvested
 metrics and event data in a diagnostic store (file-based store)
 or a JDBC based archive. The default store is file-based. 
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WLDFServerDiagnosticMBean Attribute=getDiagnosticJDBCResourceAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the instrumentation events persistence policy. If
 true, events will be persisted synchronously within the same
 thread. If false, events will be queued up to be persisted in a
 separate thread.
            
          
          
            
              The interval, in milliseconds, at which queued up
 instrumentation events will be periodically dispatched to the
 archive.
            
          
          
            
              If true, diagnostic context creation is enabled.
 If false, the diagnostic context will not be created
 when requested. However, if the diagnostics context already
 exists because it was propagated from another VM or was
 created through the DyeInjection monitor, the context will be
 made available.
            
          
          
            
              <p>This attribute controls whether the data retirement functionality runs in 
 in "test-mode". In test mode, the time granularity is 1 minute, rather than 1 hour
 in the normal case. This attribute is for internal testing use only. Its purpose is
 to enable certain data retirement tests to run in a reasonable time.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WLDFServerDiagnosticMBean Attribute=isDataRetirementTestModeEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              This attribute controls if configuration based data retirement functionality 
 is enabled on the server. If disabled, all retirement policies will be disabled.
            
          
          
            
              Return the preferred limit on the size of diagnostic store file in MB.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Return the period in hours at which diagnostic store file size check will be performed
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Return the WLDFDataRetirementByAgeMBeans parented by this  
 WLDFServerDiagnosticMBean.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the volume of diagnostic data that is automatically produced by WebLogic Server at run time.
 Note that the WLDF diagnostic volume setting does not affect explicitly configured diagnostic modules. 
 For example, this controls the volume of events generated for JRockit Flight Recorder.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WLDFDataRetirementByAgeMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WLDFDataRetirementByAgeMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Retirement age for records in hours. Older records will be eligible
 for deletion. 
 
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to NetworkChannelMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NetworkChannelMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Optional short description of this channel for console display
 purposes. For long descriptions, use the "Notes" field.
            
          
          
            
              The plaintext (non-SSL) listen port for the channel. Individual
 servers may override this value, but may not enable the port if
 disabled here and may not disable the port if enabled here.
 Individual servers may override this value using a
 NetworkAccessPointMBean.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Whether or not plaintext port is enabled for the channel.
            
          
          
            
              The SSL listen port for the channel. Individual server's may
 override this value, but may not enable the port if disabled here
 and may not disable the port if enabled here. SSL must be
 configured and enabled for this port to work. Individual servers
 may override this value using a NetworkAccessPointMBean.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Whether or not SSL port is enabled for the channel. SSL must be
 configured and enabled in addition to this setting for the SSL port
 to work.
            
          
          
            
              This channel's cluster address. If this is not set, the cluster
 address from the cluster configuration is used in its place.
            
          
          
            
              Whether or not plaintext (non-SSL) T3 traffic is enabled. Note
 that it is not possible to disable T3 traffic on the default
 channel(s).
            
          
          
            
              Whether or not secure T3 traffic is enabled. Note that it is not
 possible to disable T3 traffic on the default channel(s).
            
          
          
            
              Whether or not plaintext (non-SSL) HTTP traffic is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Whether or not secure (SSL) HTTP traffic is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether plaintext (non-SSL) COM traffic is
 enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Whether or not new server-to-server connections may consider
 this channel when initiating.
            
          
          
            
              Bind new outgoing server side T3 or T3S connections to the
 server channel's listen address. Other protocols ignore this field.
 This field is ignored for connections initiated via URLs, it takes
 effect if and only if the connection was initiated by accessing a
 remote reference (such as an EJB or RMI stub.)
            
          
          
            
              A weight to give this channel when creating server-to-server
 connections.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Allowed backlog of connection requests on the listen port(s).
 Individual servers may override this value using a
 NetworkAccessPointMBean. Setting the backlog to 0 may prevent
 accepting any incoming connection on some of the OS.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The login timeout for the server, in milliseconds. This value
 must be equal to or greater than 0. Individual servers may override
 this value using a NetworkAccessPointMBean.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Duration allowed for an SSL login sequence. If the duration is
 exceeded, the login is timed out. 0 to disable. Individual servers
 may override this value using a NetworkAccessPointMBean.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Enables tunneling via http.
            
          
          
            
              Interval (in seconds) at which to ping an http-tunneled client
 to see if its still alive. Individual servers may override this
 value using a NetworkAccessPointMBean.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Duration (in seconds) after which a missing http-tunneled client
 is considered dead. Individual servers may override this value
 using a NetworkAccessPointMBean.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds spent waiting for a complete T3
 message to be received. This attribute helps guard against denial
 of service attacks in which a caller indicates that they will be
 sending a message of a certain size which they never finish
 sending. Individual servers may override this value using a
 NetworkAccessPointMBean.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds spent waiting for a complete HTTP
 message to be received. This attribute helps guard against denial
 of service attacks in which a caller indicates that they will be
 sending a message of a certain size which they never finish
 sending. Individual servers may override this value using a
 NetworkAccessPointMBean.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds spent waiting for a complete COM
 message to be received. This attribute helps guard against denial
 of service attacks in which a caller indicates that they will be
 sending a message of a certain size which they never finish
 sending. Individual servers may override this value using a
 NetworkAccessPointMBean.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum T3 message size allowable in a message header. This
 attribute attempts to prevent a denial of service attack whereby a
 caller attempts to force the server to allocate more memory than is
 available thereby keeping the server from responding quickly to
 other requests. Individual servers may override this value using a
 NetworkAccessPointMBean.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum HTTP message size allowable in a message header.
 This attribute attempts to prevent a denial of service attack
 whereby a caller attempts to force the server to allocate more
 memory than is available thereby keeping the server from responding
 quickly to other requests. Individual servers may override this
 value using a NetworkAccessPointMBean.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum COM message size allowable in a message header. This
 attribute attempts to prevent a denial of service attack whereby a
 caller attempts to force the server to allocate more memory than is
 available thereby keeping the server from responding quickly to
 other requests. Individual servers may override this value using a
 NetworkAccessPointMBean.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Whether or not plaintext (non-SSL) IIOP traffic is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Whether or not secure IIOP traffic is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds spent waiting for a complete IIOP
 message to be received. This attribute helps guard against denial
 of service attacks in which a caller indicates that they will be
 sending a message of a certain size which they never finish
 sending. A value of 0 indicates there is no timeout.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specify the maximum IIOP message size allowable in a message
 header. This attribute attempts to prevent a denial of service
 attack whereby a caller attempts to force the server to allocate
 more memory than is available thereby keeping the server from
 responding quickly to other requests.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds an IIOP connection is allowed to
 be idle before it is closed by the server. This attribute helps
 guard against server deadlock through too many open connections. A
 value of 0 indicates there is no timeout.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The default IIOP user.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NetworkChannelMBean Attribute=getDefaultIIOPPasswordEncryptedAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebAppComponentMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebAppComponentMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebAppComponentMBean Attribute=getVirtualHostsAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the target should automatically generate an
 HTML directory listing if no suitable index file is found.
            
          
          
            
              The amount of time (in seconds) that WebLogic Server waits to
 check if a servlet was modified and needs to be reloaded.
            
          
          
            
              This provides size of the pool used for single threaded mode
 servlets. It
            
          
          
            
              Provides the name of the Realm in the Basic Authentication HTTP
 dialog box, which pops up on the browsers. authRealmName is now set
 in weblogic.xml.
            
          
          
            
              Provides the name of the AuthFilter Servlet class, which will be
 called before and after all authentication and authorization checks
 in the Web Application.
            
          
          
            
              Enables URL rewriting for session tracking.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether runtime MBeans will be created for session
 monitoring.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether classes loaded in the WEB-INF directory will
 be loaded in preference to classes loaded in the application or
 system calssloader.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ComponentMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ComponentMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              A URI that points to the application module, usually on the
 Administration Server.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebserviceCredentialProviderMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebserviceCredentialProviderMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to MinThreadsConstraintMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MinThreadsConstraintMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Minimum number of concurrent threads executing requests that share this 
 constraint.
 <p>
 A count of 0 or -1 is treated as if the constraint is not present. This
 means that the constraint is ignored for these two values. A count > 0 can
 be dynamically changed to 0 to indicate that constraint enforcement is no
 longer needed.
 </p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MinThreadsConstraintMBean Attribute=getCount)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to XMLRegistryMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLRegistryMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The fully qualified name of the class that implements the
 </tt>DocumentBuilderFactory</tt> interface.

 <p>The <tt>javax.xml.parsers.DocumentBuilderFactory</tt> factory API
 enables applications deployed to WebLogic Server to obtain an XML parser
 that produces DOM object trees from XML documents.

 <p>The built-in WebLogic Server DOM factory implementation class is
 <tt>com.sun.org.apache.xerces.internal.jaxp.DocumentBuilderFactoryImpl</tt>.
 This is the factory class applications deployed to WebLogic Server get
 by default when they request a DOM parser.  You can change this default
 by updating this value.

 <p>Return the class name of the default DocumentBuilderFactory
            
          
          
            
              The fully qualified name of the class that implements the
 </tt>SAXParserFactory</tt> interface.

 <p>The <tt>javax.xml.parsers.SAXParserFactory</tt> factory API
 enables applications deployed to WebLogic Server to configure and obtain
 a SAX-based XML parser to parse XML documents.

 <p>The built-in WebLogic Server SAX factory implementation class is
 <tt>com.sun.org.apache.xerces.internal.jaxp.SAXParserFactoryImpl</tt>.
 This is the factory class applications deployed to WebLogic Server get
 by default when they request a SAX parser.  You can change this default
 by updating this value.

 <p>Return the class name of the default SAXParserFactory
            
          
          
            
              The fully qualified name of the class that implements the
 </tt>TransformerFactory</tt> interface.

 <p>The <tt>javax.xml.transform.TransformerFactory</tt> factory API
 enables applications deployed to WebLogic Server to configure and obtain
 a <tt>Transformer</tt> object used to transform XML data into another
 format.

 <p>The built-in WebLogic Server Transformer factory implementation class is
 <tt>com.sun.org.apache.xalan.internal.xsltc.trax.TransformerFactoryIml</tt>.
 This is the factory class applications deployed to WebLogic Server get
 by default when they request a Transformer object.  You can change this
 default by updating this value.


 <p>Return the class name of the default TransformerFactory
            
          
          
            
              Provides a list of the set of ParserSelect registry entries.
            
          
          
            
              Provides a list of EntitySpec registry entries.
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies when WebLogic Server should cache external entities that it
 retrieves from the Web.

 <p>When WebLogic Server resolves an external entity within an XML file
 and retrieves the entity from the Web, you can specify that WebLogic
 Server cache this entity only when the entity is first referenced, when
 WebLogic Server first starts up, or not at all.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLRegistryMBean Attribute=getWhenToCache)
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              <p>Whether cached DTD/schema is invalidated when parsing error is encountered.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLRegistryMBean Attribute=isHandleEntityInvalidation)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to XMLParserSelectRegistryEntryMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLParserSelectRegistryEntryMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              <p>Specifies the public ID of the XML document type for which this
 XML registry entry is being configured.

 <p>When WebLogic Server starts to parse an XML document that is 
 identified with this public ID, it uses the SAX or DOM parser factory
 implementation class specified by this registry entry, rather than the
 built-in or default, when obtaining a SAX or DOM parser.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLParserSelectRegistryEntryMBean Attribute=getPublicId)
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies the system ID of the XML document type for which this
 XML registry entry is being configured.

 <p>When WebLogic Server starts to parse an XML document that is
 identified with this system ID, it uses the SAX or DOM parser factory
 implementation class specified by this registry entry, rather than the
 built-in or default, when obtaining a SAX or DOM parser.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLParserSelectRegistryEntryMBean Attribute=getSystemId)
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies the root element of the XML document type for which this
 XML registry entry is being configured.

 <p>When WebLogic Server starts to parse an XML document that is
 identified with this root element, it uses the SAX or DOM parser factory
 implementation class specified by this registry entry, rather than the
 built-in or default, when obtaining a SAX or DOM parser.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLParserSelectRegistryEntryMBean Attribute=getRootElementTag)
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies the fully qualified name of the class that implements the
 <tt>DocumentBuilderFactory</tt> API.

 <p>When WebLogic Server begins to parse an XML document identified by
 either the public ID, system ID, or root element specified in this entry,
 and the applications specifies it wants a DOM parser, then WebLogic
 Server uses this implementation class when using the 
 javax.xml.parsers.DocumentBuilderFactory to obtain the DOM parser.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLParserSelectRegistryEntryMBean Attribute=getDocumentBuilderFactory)
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies the fully qualified name of the class that implements the
 <tt>SAXParserFactory</tt> API.

 <p>When WebLogic Server begins to parse an XML document identified by
 either the public ID, system ID, or root element specified in this entry,
 and the applications specifies it wants a SAX parser, then WebLogic
 Server uses this implementation class when using the
 javax.xml.parsers.SAXParserFactory to obtain the SAX parser.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLParserSelectRegistryEntryMBean Attribute=getSAXParserFactory)
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies the fully qualified name of the class that implements the
 <tt>TransformerFactory</tt> API.

 <p>When WebLogic Server begins to transform an XML document identified by
 either the public ID, system ID, or root element specified in this entry,
 then WebLogic Server uses this implementation class when using the
 javax.xml.transform.TranformerFactory factory to obtain a Transformer
 object.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLParserSelectRegistryEntryMBean Attribute=getTransformerFactory)
            
          
          
            
              Provides the class name of any custom XML parser that is
 associated with this parser select entry.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to XMLEntitySpecRegistryEntryMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLEntitySpecRegistryEntryMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              <p>The public ID of the external entity.

 <p>When WebLogic Server is parsing an XML document and it encounters
 an external entity with this public ID, WebLogic Server
 resolves the entity (to either a local file or a URL resource) according
 to the values set for this Entity spec entry.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLEntitySpecRegistryEntryMBean Attribute=getPublicId)
            
          
          
            
              <p>The system ID of the external entity.

 <p>When WebLogic Server is parsing an XML document and it encounters
 an external entity with this system ID, WebLogic Server
 resolves the entity (to either a local file or a URL resource) according
 to the values set for this Entity spec entry.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLEntitySpecRegistryEntryMBean Attribute=getSystemId)
            
          
          
            
              The location of the external entity, either a pathname or URI.

 <p>The location of the external entity can be either a
 pathname relative to the XML Registry directories, reachable by the
 Administration Server, or a URI of the entity location in some local
 repository.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies when WebLogic Server should cache the external entities
 it retrieves from the Web.

 <p>WebLogic Server can cache the entities when they are referenced, as
 soon as possible (that is, on initialization) or never. Additionally,
 WebLogic Server can defer to the XML registry's cache setting.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies the default timeout interval (in seconds) of the external
 entity cache.

 <p>A value of <tt>-1</tt> means that the entity cache
 timeout interval defers to the one specified for the XML
 registry of which this Entity Spec entry is a part.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLEntitySpecRegistryEntryMBean Attribute=getCacheTimeoutInterval)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              <p>Whether cached DTD/schema is invalidated when parsing error is encountered.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLEntitySpecRegistryEntryMBean Attribute=getHandleEntityInvalidation)
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSStoreMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSStoreMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CoherenceClusterSystemResourceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CoherenceClusterSystemResourceMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
               The external custom Coherence cluster configuration file. 
            
          
          
            
               Specifies whether you are using a custom external Coherence cluster configuration file. 
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to FileRealmMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.FileRealmMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The maximum number of users supported by the File realm.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of groups supported by the File realm.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of positive access control lists (ACLs)
 supported by the File realm. A warning is issued when this number
 is reached.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CustomAuthConfigProviderMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CustomAuthConfigProviderMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              get the classname for the custom authentication 
 config provider
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CustomAuthConfigProviderMBean Attribute=getClassName)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CustomAuthConfigProviderMBean Attribute=getPropertiesAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to FairShareRequestClassMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.FairShareRequestClassMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Fair share value
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.FairShareRequestClassMBean Attribute=getFairShare)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WorkManagerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WorkManagerMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WorkManagerMBean Attribute=getFairShareRequestClassAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WorkManagerMBean Attribute=getResponseTimeRequestClassAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WorkManagerMBean Attribute=getContextRequestClassAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WorkManagerMBean Attribute=getMinThreadsConstraintAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WorkManagerMBean Attribute=getMaxThreadsConstraintAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WorkManagerMBean Attribute=getCapacityAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this Work Manager ignores "stuck"
 threads. Typically, stuck threads will cause the associated
 Work Manager to take some action: either switching the application
 to Admin mode, shutting down the server, or shutting down the Work
 Manager. If this flag is set, then no thread in this Work Manager    
 is ever considered stuck. 
            
          
          
            
              Configure a shutdown trigger for this WorkManager. Specifies the
 condition to be used to shutdown the WorkManager. The Server health
 monitoring periodically checks to see if the conidtion is met and
 shuts down the work manager if needed.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WorkManagerShutdownTriggerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WorkManagerShutdownTriggerMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Time after which a executing thread is declared as stuck.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WorkManagerShutdownTriggerMBean Attribute=getMaxStuckThreadTime)
            
          
          
            
              Number of stuck threads after which the WorkManager is shutdown
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WorkManagerShutdownTriggerMBean Attribute=getStuckThreadCount)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WTCImportMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WTCImportMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The name used to identify this imported service.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the local access point that offers this service.
            
          
          
            
              The comma-separated failover list that identifies the remote
 domain access points through which resources are imported.
            
          
          
            
              The remote name of this service.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to DomainMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              <p>Defines the common version of all servers in a domain. 
 In a domain containing servers that are not all at the same
 release version, this attribute is used to determine the 
 feature level that servers will assume.

 The value must be less than or equal to the version of any
 managed server in the domain. 

 If this value is not equal to the version of the release
 version of the admin server, then the admin server will
 not be allowed to make modifications to the configuration.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getDomainVersion)
            
          
          
            
              Return the last time this domain was updated. This is guaranteed
 to be unique for a given transactional modification.
            
          
          
            
              Is this domain active?
            
          
          
            
              Return the (new) security configuration for this domain.
            
          
          
            
              Return the (old) security configuration for this domain.
            
          
          
            
              Return the JTA configuration for this Domain.
            
          
          
            
              Return the JPA configuration for this Domain.
            
          
          
            
              Return the deployment configuration for this Domain.
            
          
          
            
              Return the WTCServerMBeans for this Domain.
            
          
          
            
              Return the domain logfile configuration for this domain.
            
          
          
            
              Return the SNMPAgentMBean for this domain. This is a singleton
 MBean describing SNMP Agent configuration details. This MBean has
 getters and setters for other SNMP related configuration
 MBeans.
            
          
          
            
              The SNMPAgentDeployments defined in the domain.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getSNMPAgentDeployments)
            
          
          
            
              Return the root directory for the domain. In other words for a
 server process [ServerMBean.getRootDirectory] or
 [ServerMBean.getDomainDirectory]
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Administration Server automatically
 deploys the Administration Console in the current domain.
            
          
          
            
              The context path that you want to use in URLs that specify the
 Administration Console. (Requires you to enable the Administration
 Console for the current domain.)
            
          
          
            
              Returns the directory path that console extensions
    are loaded from.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the ServerMBeans representing the servers that have been
 configured to be part of this domain.
            
          
          
            
              The CoherenceServerMBeans that have been defined for this domain. 
            
          
          
            
              Returns the ClusterMBeans representing the cluster that have
 been configured to be part of this domain.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the FileT3MBeans representing the FileT3s that have been
 configured to be part of this domain.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the MessagingBridgeMBean representing the messaging
 bridges that have been configured to be part of this domain.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether all servers in this domain run in production mode.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the embedded LDAP configuration for this domain.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the domain-wide administration port should be
 enabled for this WebLogic Server domain. Because the administration
 port uses SSL, enabling the administration port requires that SSL
 must be configured for all servers in the domain.
            
          
          
            
              The common secure administration port for this WebLogic Server
 domain. (Requires you to enable the administration port.)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether optimizations for Oracle Exalogic should be enabled. 
 Optimizations include improved thread management and request processing, and reduced 
 lock contention. This attribute should be enabled only when configuring a WebLogic domain 
 for Oracle Exalogic. For more information, see "Enabling Exalogic-Specific Enhancements in 
 Oracle WebLogic Server 11g Release 1 (10.3.4)" in the Oracle Exalogic Deployment Guide.
            
          
          
            
              The number of archival versions of <tt>config.xml</tt> saved by
 the Administration Server each time the domain configuration is
 modified.
            
          
          
            
              If true, then backups of the configuration will be made
 during server boot.
            
          
          
            
              The release identifier for the configuration. This identifier
 will be used to indicate the version of the configuration. All
 server generated configurations will be established with the
 release identifier of the running server. The form of the version
 is major.minor.servicepack.rollingpatch. Not all parts of the
 version are required. i.e. "7" is acceptable.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Administration Server generates a log
 message when this WebLogic Server domain's configuration has been
 modified.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the criteria used for auditing configuration events  (configuration changes and other operations):
 <ul>
 <li><code>CONFIG_CHANGE_NONE</code> Configuration events will neither be
 written to the server log or directed to the Security Audit Framework.</li>
 <li><code>CONFIG_CHANGE_LOG</code> Configuration events will be
 written to the server log.</li>
 <li><code>CONFIG_CHANGE_AUDIT</code>Configuration events will be
 directed to the Security Audit Framework.</li>
 <li><code>CONFIG_CHANGE_LOG_AND_AUDIT</code> Configuration events will be
 written to the server log and directed to the Security Audit Framework.</li>
 </ul>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getConfigurationAuditType)
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies that deployments targeted to a cluster succeed only if
 all servers in the cluster are running.
            
          
          
            
              The collection of deployable entities in this domain.
 This replaces the Application in previous versions. 
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getLibraries)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getDomainLibraries)
            
          
          
            
              Define wSReliableDeliveryPolicies for this Domain
            
          
          
            
              Define JDBCDataSourceFactories for this Domain
            
          
          
            
              Define machines for this Domain
            
          
          
            
              Returns all the XMLEntityCache objects defined 
 in this domain
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getXMLEntityCaches)
            
          
          
            
              Define xMLRegistries for this Domain
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getFileRealms)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getCachingRealms)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getRealms)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getPasswordPolicies)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getCustomRealms)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getLDAPRealms)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getNTRealms)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getRDBMSRealms)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getUnixRealms)
            
          
          
            
              Define JMSServers for this Domain
            
          
          
            
              Define VirtualHosts for this Domain
            
          
          
            
              Returns an array of the contained MigratableTarget MBeans
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getEJBContainer)
            
          
          
            
              Collection of global properties to be applied on all
 webapps in this domain.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getWebAppContainer)
            
          
          
            
              The configuration of the JMX Subsystem.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getJMX)
            
          
          
            
              Get the WorkManager configuration pieces for this domain
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getSelfTuning)
            
          
          
            
              Define PathService for this Domain
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getPathServices)
            
          
          
            
              Return the JMSBridgeDestinations for this Domain.
            
          
          
            
              Return the BridgeDestinations for this Domain.
            
          
          
            
              Retrieve ShutdownClasses for this Domain
            
          
          
            
              Retrieve StartupClasses for this Domain
            
          
          
            
              Retrieve SingletonServicees for this Domain
            
          
          
            
              Retrieve MailSessions for this Domain
            
          
          
            
              Return the JoltConnectionPools for this Domain.
            
          
          
            
              Gets the array of log filters defined in the domain
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getLogFilters)
            
          
          
            
              Return file stores defined in this domain
            
          
          
            
              Return file stores defined in this domain
            
          
          
            
              Returns the JMS Interop Module that have been defined for this domain.
 
            
          
          
            
              Returns the JMSSystemResourceMBeans that have been defined for this domain.
 
            
          
          
            
              Returns the JMSSystemResourceMBeans that have been defined for this domain.
 
            
          
          
            
              Get all the defined Foreign JNDI Providers
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getForeignJNDIProviders)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getAdminServerName)
            
          
          
            
              The default protocol for communicating through the
 administration port or administration channels. (Requires you to
 enable the administration port or to create an administration
 channel.)
            
          
          
            
              Returns the WLDFSystemResourceMBeans that have been defined for this domain.
 
            
          
          
            
              Returns the JDBCSystemResourceMBeans that have been defined for this domain
 
            
          
          
            
              Get SAFAgentMBean for this Domain
            
          
          
            
              Get WLECConnectionPools for this Domain
            
          
          
            
              Get ErrorHandlingMBean for this Domain
            
          
          
            
              Get RemoteSAFContextMBean for this Domain
            
          
          
            
              Returns an array of the contained MigratableRMIService MBeans
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getWebserviceSecurities)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getJMSConnectionConsumers)
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether autodeployed applications could include JMS modules. If true then any submodules
 defined in the application's JMS modules will be deployed with default targets. The submodules
 define the different destinations in the JMS module, eg topics and queues, and if they aren't provided with
 explicit targets they may not be properly deployed.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=isAutoDeployForSubmodulesEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              get AdminConsoleMBean object, a console specific MBean to configure weblogic
  administration console attributes.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getAdminConsole)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether internal applications such as the console,
 uddi, wlstestclient, and uddiexplorer are deployed on demand (first access) instead of
 during server startup. 
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Guardian Agent is deployed when starting
 servers in the current domain.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether OCM functionality should be enabled for this domain.
 
            
          
          
            
              Configures whether log messages will be logged with the BEA legacy message ID prefix.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=isMsgIdPrefixCompatibilityEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              The CoherenceClusterSystemResourceMBeans that have been defined  
 for this domain. 
            
          
          
            
              The configuration of the Management Services Subsystem.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainMBean Attribute=getRestfulManagementServices)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SecurityConfigurationMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityConfigurationMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Creates a Jaspic MBean from which AuthConfigProviders can
 be created and configured.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityConfigurationMBean Attribute=getJASPIC)
            
          
          
            
              Returns all the realms in the domain.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityConfigurationMBean Attribute=getRealms)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityConfigurationMBean Attribute=getDefaultRealmAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Returns true if anonymous JNDI access for Admin MBean home is
 permitted. This is overridden by the Java property
 <code>-Dweblogic.management.anonymousAdminLookupEnabled</code>.
            
          
          
            
              Returns true if allow access to credential in clear text.
 This can be overridden by the system property
 <code>-Dweblogic.management.clearTextCredentialAccessEnabled</code>
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityConfigurationMBean Attribute=getCredentialEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              This property defines the case sensitive URL-pattern matching
 behavior for security constraints, servlets, filters, virtual-hosts,
 and so on, in the Web application container and external security policies.

 <b>Note:</b> This is a Windows-only flag that is provided for backward
 compatibility when upgrading from pre-9.0 versions of WebLogic Server.
 On Unix platforms, setting this value to <code>true</code> causes 
 undesired behavior and is not supported.

 When the value is set to <code>os</code>, the pattern matching will be case-
 sensitive on all platforms except the Windows file system.

 Note that on non-Windows file systems, WebLogic Server does not enforce
 case sensitivity and relies on the file system for optimization.
 As a result, if you have a Windows Samba mount from Unix or Mac OS
 that has been installed in case-insensitive mode, there is a chance
 of a security risk. If so, specify case-insensitive lookups by setting 
 this attribute to <code>true</code>.

 Note also that this property is used to preserve backward compatibility on
 Windows file systems only. In prior releases, WebLogic Server was case-
 insensitive on Windows. As of WebLogic Server 9.0, URL-pattern
 matching is strictly enforced.

 During the upgrade of older domains, the value of this parameter
 is explicitly set to <code>os</code> by the upgrade plug-in to
 preserve backward compatibility.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Indicates which version of the default security realm MBeans
 should be loaded if none exist. The value is set to current version
 on initial read if it has not already been set.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The name of the Java class that implements a connection filter
 (that is, the <tt>weblogic.security.net.ConnectionFilter</tt>
 interface). If no class name is specified, no connection filter
 will be used.
            
          
          
            
              <p>The rules used by any connection filter that implements the
 <tt>ConnectionFilterRulesListener</tt> interface. When using the
 default implementation and when no rules are specified, all
 connections are accepted. The default implementation rules are in
 the format: <tt>target localAddress localPort action
 protocols</tt>.

 <p> This attribute replaces the deprecated ConnectionFilterRules
 attribute on the SecurityMBean.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityConfigurationMBean Attribute=getConnectionFilterRules)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this WebLogic Server domain should log
 accepted connections.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this WebLogic Server domain
 enables compatiblity with previous connection filters.
            
          
          
            
              The user name that the Administration Server uses to communicate
 with Node Manager when starting,
 stopping, or restarting Managed Servers. 
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityConfigurationMBean Attribute=getNodeManagerPasswordEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the WebLogic Server principal name is compared using a
 case insensitive match when the equals
 method for the principal object is performed.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the GUID and DN data in a WebLogic Server principal
 object are used when the equals method of that object is invoked. 
            
          
          
            
              Whether or not to downgrade to anonymous principals that cannot
 be verified. This is useful for server-server communication
 between untrusted domains.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityConfigurationMBean Attribute=getDowngradeUntrustedPrincipals)
            
          
          
            
              Whether or not the system should enforce strict URL pattern or not.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityConfigurationMBean Attribute=getEnforceStrictURLPattern)
            
          
          
            
              Whether or not the system should allow requests with invalid Basic
 Authentication credentials to access unsecure resources.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityConfigurationMBean Attribute=getEnforceValidBasicAuthCredentials)
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether the console is enabled for fully delegate authorization.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityConfigurationMBean Attribute=getDefaultRealmInternalAsString)
            
          
          
            
              <p> Specifies a list of remote domains for which cross-domain check
 should not be applied.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityConfigurationMBean Attribute=getExcludedDomainNames)
            
          
          
            
              <p> Indicates whether or not cross-domain security is enabled
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityConfigurationMBean Attribute=isCrossDomainSecurityEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              Determines the domain's X509 certificate revocation checking 
 configuration.
 <p>
 A CertRevocMBean is always associated with a domain's
 security configuration and cannot be changed, although
 CertRevocMBean attributes may be changed as documented.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SecurityConfigurationMBean Attribute=getCertRevoc)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JTAMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JTAMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Specifies the maximum amount of time, in seconds, an active transaction is 
 allowed to be in the first phase of a two-phase commit transaction. If the specified 
 amount of time expires, the transaction is automatically rolled back.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the maximum amount of time, in seconds, a 
 transaction manager persists in attempting to complete  
 the second phase of a two-phase commit transaction. 
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the maximum amount of time, in seconds, a transaction manager waits
 for all resource managers to respond and indicate if the transaction can be committed or rolled back.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the transaction manager automatically
 performs an XA Resource <code>forget</code> operation for heuristic
 transaction completions.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of cycles that the transaction manager 
 performs the <tt>beforeCompletion</tt> synchronization callback for
 this WebLogic Server domain.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of simultaneous in-progress transactions
 allowed on a server in this WebLogic Server domain.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of unique transaction names for which
 statistics are maintained.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Maximum number of concurrent requests to resources allowed for
 each server.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Maximum allowed time duration, in milliseconds,  for XA calls to resources. If a
 particular XA call to a resource exceeds the limit, the resource is
 declared unavailable.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Maximum duration time, in milliseconds, that a resource is declared
 dead. After the duration, the resource is declared available
 again, even if the resource provider does not explicitly
 re-register the resource.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The interval that recovery is attempted until the resource
 becomes available.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The time interval, in seconds,  that the checkpoint is done for the migrated
 transaction logs (TLOGs).
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The interval for which the transaction map must be full for the
 JTA subsystem to declare its health as CRITICAL.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The interval that a particular resource must be accessed within
 for it to be included in the checkpoint record.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The interval at which the transaction manager creates a new
 transaction log file and checks all old transaction log files to
 see if they are ready to be deleted.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The time interval, in milliseconds, at which internal objects used to serialize
 resource enlistment are cleaned up.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Indicates that XA calls are executed in parallel if there are available threads.
            
          
          
            
              The dispatch policy to use when performing XA operations in
 parallel. By default the policy of the thread coordinating the
 transaction is used. Note that the named execute queue must be
 configured on the target server.
            
          
          
            
              The amount of time, in seconds, a  transaction manager waits
 for transactions involving the resource to complete
 before unregistering a resource. This grace period helps minimize 
 the risk of abandoned transactions because of an unregistered resource, such as a 
 JDBC data source module packaged with an application.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the security mode of the communication channel used 
 for XA calls between servers that participate in a global transaction.
 All server instances in a domain must have the same security mode setting.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
               Specifies transport security mode required by WebService Transaction endpoints.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether to use <code>issuedtoken</code> to enable authentication between the WS-AT
 coordinator and participant.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates that the two-phase commit protocol is used to coordinate transactions across two or more resource managers.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to DeploymentConfigurationMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DeploymentConfigurationMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Specifies the maximum number of application versions for each 
 application.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Remote Deployer EJB is automatically
 deployed in the current domain. The Remote Deployer EJB is only used by
 the weblogic.Deployer tool in the WLS 9.0 and 9.1 releases when the -remote 
 option is specified.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether applications with staging mode of STAGE are restaged only 
 during redeploy operation. If set to true, then applications will never
 restage during server startup and will only be restaged on an explicit redeploy
 operation.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WTCServerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WTCServerMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The local Tuxedo domains defined for this WTC Server.
            
          
          
            
              The remote Tuxedo domains defined for this WTC Server.
            
          
          
            
              Provides information on services exported by a local Tuxedo
 access point. Defines your Exported Services when configured using
 the Administration Console.
            
          
          
            
              Provides information on services imported and available on
 remote domains. Defines your Imported Services when configured
 using the Administration Console.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the configuration information for inter-domain
 authentication. Defines your Passwords when configured using the
 Administration Console.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies global field table classes, view table classes, and
 application passwords for domains. Defines your Resources when
 configured using the Administration Console.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies global configuration information for the transfer of
 messages between WebLogic Server and Tuxedo. Defines your Tuxedo
 Queuing Bridge when configured using the Administration
 Console.
            
          
          
            
              gets all WTCtBridgeRedirect objects
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WTCServerMBean Attribute=getWTCtBridgeRedirects)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WTCResourcesMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WTCResourcesMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The names of <tt>FldTbl16Classes</tt> that are loaded via a
 class loader and added to a <tt>FldTbl</tt> array.
            
          
          
            
              The names of <tt>FldTbl32Classes</tt> that are loaded via a
 class loader and added to a <tt>FldTbl</tt> array.
            
          
          
            
              The names of <tt>ViewTbl16Classes</tt> that are loaded via a
 class loader and added to a <tt>ViewTbl</tt> array.
            
          
          
            
              The names of <tt>ViewTbl32Classes</tt> that are loaded via a
 class loader and added to a <tt>ViewTbl</tt> array.
            
          
          
            
              The application password as returned from the
 <code>genpasswd</code> utility.
            
          
          
            
              The initialization vector used to encrypt the
 <tt>AppPassword</tt>.
            
          
          
            
              The full path to the <tt>TPUSR</tt> file, which contains Tuxedo
 UID/GID information.
            
          
          
            
              The default encoding name of sending MBSTRING data.
            
          
          
            
              The encoding name map file between Java and Tuxedo MBSTRING.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WTCtBridgeRedirectMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WTCtBridgeRedirectMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The direction of data flow. At least one redirection must be
 specified or the Tuxedo queuing bridge will fail to start and an
 error will be logged.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The type of XML/FML translation.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The name of the metadata file URL used to pass the call to the
 XML-to-non-XML WebLogic XML Translator (WLXT).
            
          
          
            
              The name of the JMS queue used specifically for synchronous
 calls to a Tuxedo service. The response is returned to the JMS
 ReplyQ.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the local or remote access point where the source is
 located.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the Qspace for a source location.
            
          
          
            
              The name of a source queue or service. Specifies a JMS queue
 name, a Tuxedo queue name, or the name of a Tuxedo service.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the local or remote access point where the target is
 located.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the Qspace for a target location.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the target queue or service. Specifies a JMS queue
 name, a Tuxedo queue name, or the name of a Tuxedo service.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SNMPAgentMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SNMPAgentMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Specifies whether this SNMP agent is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this SNMP agent sends automatically
 generated notifications to SNMP managers.
            
          
          
            
              The port on which you want this SNMP agent to
 listen for incoming requests from SNMP managers that use
 the UDP protocol.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The SNMP notification version that this SNMP agent generates.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The minimum number of seconds that this SNMP agent
 caches OIDs before checking if new ones have been added to the
 Management Information Base (MIB).
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The multiplier used to calculate the interval at which this
 SNMP agent checks for newly started or shut down server instances.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The password (community name) that you want this SNMP
 agent to use to secure SNMPv1 or v2 communication with SNMP managers.
 Requires you to enable community based access for this agent.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The absolute path of a user-defined intelligent MIB file. The
 MIB file will be loaded by interpreted SNMP Agent, and response to
 the SNMP request according to the AGENT-CLAUSE. This attribute will
 not be supported in this SS release due to licensing issues.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The minimum severity of debug messages that this SNMP agent
 generates.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              WebLogic Server uses a trap destination to specify the SNMP
 management station and the community name used by the SNMP agent to
 send notifications. Select which trap destination(s) should be
 used in this WebLogic Server domain from the list of available trap
 destinations.
            
          
          
            
              The SNMP agents for which this SNMP agent is a proxy.
 <code>SNMPProxyMBeans</code> describe settings for SNMP agents to
 be proxied by this SNMP agent.
            
          
          
            
              The <code>SNMPGaugeMonitorMBeans</code> which describe the
 criteria for generating notifications based on JMX GaugeMonitor.
            
          
          
            
              The <code>SNMPStringMonitorMBeans</code> which describe the
 criteria for generating notifications based on JMX StringMonitor.
            
          
          
            
              The <code>SNMPCounterMonitorMBeans</code> which describe the
 criteria for generating notifications based on JMX CounterMonitor.
            
          
          
            
              The <code>SNMPLogFilterMBeans</code> which describe filters for
 generating notifications based on server log messages.
            
          
          
            
              The <code>SNMPAttributeChangeMBeans</code> which describe the
 MBean type and Attribute name for which attribute change notification
 should be sent when an attribute change is observed.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this SNMP agent supports SNMPv1 and v2.
            
          
          
            
              An identifier for this SNMP agent that is unique amongst all
 other SNMP agents in the current WebLogic Server domain.
            
          
          
            
              The protocol that this SNMP agent uses to ensure that only authorized
 users can request or receive information about your WebLogic Server domain. 
 Applicable only with SNMPv3.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The protocol that this SNMP agent uses to encrypt and unencrypt messages.
 Applicable only with SNMPv3. Requires you to also use an authentication
 protocol.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of milliseconds that this SNMP agent will wait
 for a response to an INFORM notification.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of times that this SNMP agent will
 resend INFORM notifications for which it has not received a response.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of milliseconds after which WebLogic Server invalidates
 its cache of SNMP security keys. Setting a high value creates a risk
 that users whose credentials have been removed can still access
 SNMP data.
            
          
          
            
              Configures this SNMP agent to provide read-only access to 
 MBean types that you have created and registered (custom MBeans).
            
          
          
            
              Configures this SNMP agent to send notifications as an 
 INFORM instead of a TRAP. Requires you to specify
 the agent's SNMPTrapVersion as SNMPv2 or SNMPv3.
            
          
          
            
              The port that this SNMP agent uses to communicate with 
 its subagents.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SNMPProxyMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SNMPProxyMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The port number on which this proxied SNMP agent is
 listening.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The root of the object identifier (OID) tree that this proxied
 SNMP agent controls.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The community name to be passed on for all SNMPv1 requests to this
 proxied SNMP agent.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of milliseconds that the WebLogic Server SNMP agent
 waits for a response to requests that it forwards to this 
 proxy agent.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The user name on whose behalf the WebLogic SNMP agent forwards v3 
 requests.  If not specified, the request is forwarded as a v1 request.
            
          
          
            
              The security level that the proxied SNMP agent expects
 for the specified security name.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SNMPProxyMBean Attribute=getSecurityLevel)
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SNMPGaugeMonitorMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SNMPGaugeMonitorMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The high threshold at which a notification should be generated. A notification
 is generated the first time the monitored value is equal to or greater than
 this value.
            
          
          
            
              The low threshold at which a notification should be generated. A notification is
 generated the first time the monitored value is less than or equal to this
 value.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SNMPJMXMonitorMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SNMPJMXMonitorMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The MBean type that defines the attribute you want to monitor.
 Do not include the <code>MBean</code> suffix. For example,
 <code>ServerRuntime</code>.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The name of the MBean instance that you want to monitor. If you
 leave the name undefined, WebLogic Server monitors all instances of
 the MBean type that you specify in Monitored MBean Type.
            
          
          
            
              The name of an MBean attribute to monitor. This attribute must
 be in the WebLogic Server MIB.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The frequency (in seconds) that WebLogic Server checks the
 attribute value.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SNMPStringMonitorMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SNMPStringMonitorMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The string against which the value of the monitored attribute
 will be compared.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Generates a notification if the value of the monitored attribute and the
 value of String to Compare are different.
            
          
          
            
              Generates a notification if the value of the monitored attribute and the
 value of String to Compare are the same.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SNMPCounterMonitorMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SNMPCounterMonitorMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Specifies a value that triggers the Counter Monitor to generate
 a notification.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              An integer value to be added to the threshold value each time the
 observed value equals or exceeds the threshold.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              An integer value to be subtracted from the threshold value when
 the threshold value is crossed.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SNMPAgentDeploymentMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SNMPAgentDeploymentMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SNMPAgentDeploymentMBean Attribute=getTargetsAsString)
            
          
          
            
              A priority that the server uses to determine when it deploys an
 item. The priority is relative to other deployable items of the
 same type.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ServerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getMachineAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The default TCP port that this server uses to listen for regular
 (non-SSL) incoming connections.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this server can be reached through the default
 plain-text (non-SSL) listen port.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getClusterAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The proportion of the load that this server will bear, relative
 to other servers in a cluster.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Defines preferred clustered instances considered for hosting
 replicas of the primary HTTP session states created on the
 server.
            
          
          
            
              Defines secondary clustered instances considered for hosting
 replicas of the primary HTTP session states created on the
 server.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the identifier to be used for consensus-based algorithms.
 Each server should have a unique identifier indexed from 0.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether Node Manager can automatically restart this
 server and its services on another machine if the server fails.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the web server for this server. A server has exactly one
 WebServer. A server may also have one or more VirtualHosts. A
 VirtualHost is a subclass of WebServer.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this server maintains a JDBC log file.
            
          
          
            
              Perpetuated for compatibility with 6.1 GA only. Indicates a
 version 6.1 server that cannot deploy modules based on EJB 2.0 or
 Servlet 2.3.
            
          
          
            
              Perpetuated for compatibility with 6.1 GA only.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this server has IIOP support enabled for both
 the regular (non-SSL) and SSL ports.
            
          
          
            
              The user name of the default IIOP user. (Requires you to enable
 IIOP.)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getDefaultIIOPPasswordEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this server supports Tuxedo GIOP (TGIOP)
 requests. (Requires you to configure WebLogic Tuxedo Connector
 (WTC) for this server.)
            
          
          
            
              The default user associated with the Tuxedo GIOP (TGIOP)
 protocol. (Requires you to configure WebLogic Tuxedo Connector
 (WTC) for this server.)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getDefaultTGIOPPasswordEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether COM support is enabled on the regular
 (non-SSL) port. COM is not supported on the SSL port. (The
 remaining fields on this page are relevant only if you check this
 box.)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether JRMP support is enabled on the regular
 (non-SS) port. JRMP is not supported on the SSL port.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the server's COM configuration.
            
          
          
            
              The debug setting for this server.
            
          
          
            
              Whether or not HTTP support is enabled on the regular port or
 SSL port.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getSystemPasswordEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              True if commands can be typed at console. REMOVE?
            
          
          
            
              Returns the maximum time that the server will wait for server
 sockets to bind before starting a listen thread.
            
          
          
            
              Determines whether the server should bind server sockets
 early.
            
          
          
            
              The IP address or DNS name this server uses to listen for
 incoming connections.
            
          
          
            
              The external IP address or DNS name for this server.
            
          
          
            
              The IP address of the NIC that this server should use for
 multicast traffic.
            
          
          
            
              Network access points, or "NAPs", define additional ports and
 addresses that this server listens on. Additionally, if two servers
 both support the same channel for a given protocol, then new
 connections between them will use that channel.
            
          
          
            
              The number of backlogged, new TCP connection requests that
 should be allowed for this server's regular and SSL ports.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Get max backoff time between failures while accepting client
 connections.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The login timeout for this server's default regular (non-SSL)
 listen port. This is the maximum amount of time allowed for a new
 connection to establish.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether or not administration port is enabled for the
 server. This field is derived from the DomainMBean and has no
 setter here All the server (7.0 and later) in s single domain
 should either have an administration port or not The administration
 port uses SSL, so SSL must be configured and enabled properly for
 it to be active.
            
          
          
            
              The secure administration port for the server. This port
 requires that you enable the domain's administration port and that
 SSL is configured and enabled.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              List of factories that create transportable objects.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getIIOPConnectionPoolsAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getXMLRegistryAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getXMLEntityCacheAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The Java compiler to use for all applications hosted on this
 server that need to compile Java code.
            
          
          
            
              The options to prepend to the Java compiler classpath when
 compiling Java code.
            
          
          
            
              The options to append to the Java compiler classpath when
 compiling Java code.
            
          
          
            
              The options passed to the RMIC compiler during server-side
 generation.
            
          
          
            
              The options passed to the EJB compiler during server-side
 generation.
            
          
          
            
              Whether or not verbose deployment of EJBs is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              The path prefix for the server's JTA transaction log files. If
 the pathname is not absolute, the path is assumed to be relative to
 the server's root directory.
            
          
          
            
              The policy that determines how transaction log file entries are
 written to disk. This policy can affect transaction performance.
 (Note: To be transactionally safe, the Direct-Write policy may
 require additional OS or environment changes on some Windows
 systems.)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Whether or not the server will attempt to load classes from the
 network.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether tunneling for the T3, T3S, HTTP, HTTPS, IIOP,
 and IIOPS protocols should be enabled for this server.
            
          
          
            
              The interval (in seconds) at which to ping a tunneled client to
 see if it is still alive.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The amount of time (in seconds) after which a missing tunneled
 client is considered dead.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds between reconnection attempts to the
 admin server. When the admin server fails the managed server
 will periodically try to connect back to it.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this server uses JMS default connection
 factories.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the ServerStartMBean that can be used to start up this
 server remotely.
            
          
          
            
              Perpetuated for compatibility with 6.1 only.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the JTAMigratableTargetMBean that is used to deploy the
 JTA Recovery Service to (is the server's cluster is not null).
            
          
          
            
              The amount of time (in seconds) that defines the interval over
 which this server determines average free memory values.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of times this server samples free memory during the
 time period specified by LowMemoryTimeInterval.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The granularity level (in percent) that this server uses for
 logging low memory conditions and changing the server health state
 to <tt>Warning</tt>.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The threshold level (in percent) that this server uses for
 logging low memory conditions and changing the server health state
 to <tt>Warning</tt>.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The directory path on the Managed Server where all staged
 (prepared) applications are placed.
            
          
          
            
              The directory path on the Administration Server where all
 uploaded applications are placed.
            
          
          
            
              The mode that specifies whether an application's files are
 copied from a source on the Administration Server to the Managed
 Server's staging area during application preparation.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Node Manager can automatically restart
 this server if it crashes or otherwise goes down
 unexpectedly.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Node Manager should automatically kill
 this server if its health state is <code>failed</code>.
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds during which this server can be restarted,
 up to the number of times specified in RestartMax.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of times that the Node Manager can restart this
 server within the interval specified in RestartIntervalSeconds.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds that defines the frequency of this
 server's self-health monitoring. The server monitors the health of
 it's subsystems every HealthCheckIntervalSeconds and changes the
 Server's overall state if required.
 
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds the Node Manager should wait before timing
 out its health query to this server.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds the Node Manager should wait before
 starting to monitor the server.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds the Node Manager should wait before
 restarting this server.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The ClasspathServlet will serve any class file in the classpath
 and is registered by default in every Web application (including
 management). It does not need to be turned on for many applications
 though, and represents a security hole if unchecked.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether all default servlets in the servlet engine are
 disabled.
            
          
          
            
              The release identifier for the server. Since this is a
 configured attribute it is only as accurate as the configuration.
 The form of the version is major.minor.servicepack.rollingpatch.
 Not all parts of the version are required. i.e. "7" is
 acceptable.
            
          
          
            
              The state in which this server should be started. If you specify
 <tt>STANDBY</tt>, you must also enable the domain-wide
 administration port.
            
          
          
            
              Number of seconds a force shutdown operation waits before timing
 out and killing itself. If the operation does not complete within
 the configured timeout seconds, the server will shutdown
 automatically if the state of the server at that time was
 <code>SHUTTING_DOWN</code>.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Timeout value for server start and resume operations.
 If the server fails to start in the timeout period, it will force
 shutdown.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Number of seconds a graceful shutdown operation waits before
 forcing a shut down. A graceful shutdown gives WebLogic Server
 subsystems time to complete certain application processing
 currently in progress. If subsystems are unable to complete
 processing within the number of seconds that you specify here, then
 the server will force shutdown automatically.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether a graceful shutdown operation drops all HTTP
 sessions immediately.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this Managed Server can be started when the
 Administration Server is unavailable.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Administration Server replicates its
 configuration files to this Managed Server.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the <tt>HttpClusterServlet</tt> proxies the
 client certificate in a special header.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this server uses the proprietary
 <tt>WL-Proxy-Client-IP</tt> header, which is recommended if the
 server instance will receive requests from a proxy plug-in.
            
          
          
            
              Gets the hostsMigratableServices attribute of the ServerMBean
 object
            
          
          
            
              Returns the HttpTraceSupportEnabled value
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=isHttpTraceSupportEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              Which configuration rules should be used for finding the
 server's identity and trust keystores?
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The path and file name of the identity keystore.
            
          
          
            
              The type of the keystore. Generally, this is
 <code>JKS</code>.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getCustomIdentityKeyStorePassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The path and file name of the custom trust keystore.
            
          
          
            
              The type of the keystore. Generally, this is
 <code>JKS</code>.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getCustomTrustKeyStorePassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getJavaStandardTrustKeyStorePassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getReliableDeliveryPolicyAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether message IDs in logged messages will include a
 prefix. Message ids are 6 digit numeric strings that can be
 optionally presented in a log entry with a prefix. The prefix used
 by server messages is "BEA-".
            
          
          
            
              Controls the configuration of the default persistent store on
 this server. Each server has a default store, which is a file-based
 object repository used by various subsystems.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getCandidateMachinesAsString)
            
          
          
            
              get attributes related to server overload protection
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getOverloadProtection)
            
          
          
            
              The table name for this server's Logging Last Resource (LLR)
 database table(s). WebLogic Server creates the table(s) and then uses
 them during transaction processing for the LLR transaction optimization.
 This setting must be unique for each server. The default table name is
 <code>WL_LLR_<i>SERVERNAME</i></code>.
            
          
          
            
              Enables the use of the <code>ADM_DDL </code> store procedure for LLR. The 
 default value is <code>false</code> (not enabled). 
            
          
          
            
              Get the size of the XID column of the JDBC LLR table,
 This setting takes effect only when the table is first created.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getJDBCLLRTableXIDColumnSize)
            
          
          
            
              Get the size of the pool name column of the JDBC LLR table,
 This setting takes effect only when the table is first created.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getJDBCLLRTablePoolColumnSize)
            
          
          
            
              Get the size of the record data column of the JDBC LLR table,
 This setting takes effect only when the table is first created.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getJDBCLLRTableRecordColumnSize)
            
          
          
            
              The JDBC Login Timeout value. Specified value is passed
 into java.sql.DriverManager.setLoginTimeout(). Note that this
 JDBC drivers loaded
 into this JVM. Feature is disabled by default.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getJDBCLoginTimeoutSeconds)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The diagnostic configuration for the servers
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getServerDiagnosticConfig)
            
          
          
            
              Get the performance flag for disabling Finalize Method
 in JDBC Wrapper Code
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getAutoJDBCConnectionClose)
            
          
          
            
              Protocols supported by this server.
            
          
          
            
              Gets the Federation Services MBean
            
          
          
            
              Gets the Single Sign-On Services MBean
            
          
          
            
              Gets Web service configuration for this server
            
          
          
            
              Returns the timeout value to be used by NodeManagerRuntime when creating a
 a socket connection to the agent. Default set high as SSH agent may require 
 a high connection establishment time.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getNMSocketCreateTimeoutInMillis)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getCoherenceClusterSystemResourceAsString)
            
          
          
            
              When WLS is running on JRVE, this specifies the name of the virtual machine
 running this server
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getVirtualMachineName)
            
          
          
            
              When WLS is running on Exalogic machines, cluster replication traffic could
 go over multiple replication channels. However multiple replication channels 
 need not be configured on each clustered server instance. 
 Only one replication channel with explicit IP-Address needs to be 
 configured for each server and replicationPorts range can be 
 specified for each server. For eg. range 7001-7010 will create 10 
 replication channels with ports 7001 to 7010 for the given server.
 These channels inherits all the properties of the configured replication 
 channel except the listen port.Names of these channels will be derived from 
 the configured replication channel with suffic {x} added where x could be 
 1,2.. as per the number of ports specified.
 Public ports are same as the listen port for these additional channels.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerMBean Attribute=getReplicationPorts)
            
          
          
            
              The JDBC TLOG store used for transaction logging. 
            
          
          
            
              The data source configured for the persistent TLOG JDBC store used for transaction logging.
 A server has exactly one DataSource.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to KernelMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.KernelMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.KernelMBean Attribute=getValidProtocolsAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the kernel is allowed to perform reverse DNS
 lookups.
            
          
          
            
              The protocol to use for connections when none is specified.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The protocol to use for secure connections when none is
 specified.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Returns the protocol to be used for administrative connections
 when none is specified.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The size of the execute thread pool.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The size of the system execute thread pool.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Get the minimum thread pool size of the self-tuning thread pool.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Sets the maximum thread pool size of the self-tuning thread pool.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The size of the JMS execute thread pool.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether native I/O is enabled for the server.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the /dev/poll device should be used for
 Muxing.
            
          
          
            
              To enable non-blocking IO, enter <code>weblogic.socket.NIOSocketMuxer</code> in
  the <code>Muxer Class</code> field. 
            
          
          
            
              The number of socket reader threads
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The percentage of execute threads from the default queue that
 can be used as socket readers.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The minimum number of milliseconds a muxer thread should attempt
 to read from a given socket. This value is ignored if native IO is
 enabled.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of milliseconds a muxer thread should attempt
 to read from a given socket. This value is ignored if native IO is
 enabled.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether new server-to-server connections may consider
 the default server channel when initiating a connection. This is
 only relevant if the connection needs to be bound to the default
 listen address. This will only work for binary protocols that
 support both outbound and inbound traffic.
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies whether the SSL identity specified by
 {@link SSLMBean#ServerPrivateKeyAlias SSLMBean#ServerPrivateKeyAlias} for this server
 should be used for outbound SSL connections on the default
 server channel. In normal circumstances the outbound identity is
 determined by the caller's environment.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.KernelMBean Attribute=isOutboundPrivateKeyEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of bytes allowed in messages that are
 received over all supported protocols, unless overridden by a
 protocol-specific setting or a custom channel setting.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of bytes allowed in messages
 that are received over the T3 protocol. If you configure custom network
 channels for this server, each channel can override this maximum message
 size.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the server's buffer size for sending or receiving data
 through a raw socket should be set to 4KB. 
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of bytes allowed in messages
 that are received over the HTTP protocol. If you configure custom network
 channels for this server, each channel can override this maximum message
 size.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of bytes allowed in messages
 that are received over the COM protocol. If you configure custom network
 channels for this server, each channel can override this maximum message
 size.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of bytes allowed in messages
 that are received over the IIOP protocol. If you configure custom network
 channels for this server, each channel can override this maximum message
 size.
            
          
          
            
              The default minor GIOP version for IIOP messages. This attribute
 is useful for client orbs with broken GIOP 1.2 implementations.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specify whether outbound calls should use an initial
 LocateRequest.
            
          
          
            
              Configures IIOP propagate transactions using either
 WebLogic-specific JTA or the OMG-specified OTS.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specify how IIOP location forward host selection should be
 applied.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              <p>The amount of time that this server should wait to
 establish an outbound socket connection before timing out. A
 value of <code>0</code> disables server connect timeout.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.KernelMBean Attribute=getConnectTimeout)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds that this server waits for a
 complete message to be received. If you configure network channels
 for this server, each channel can override this message
 timeout.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds spent waiting for a complete T3
 message to be received. If you configure network channels for this
 server, each channel can override this T3 message timeout.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds spent waiting for a complete HTTP
 message to be received. If you configure network channels for this
 server, each channel can override this HTTP message timeout.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds spent waiting for a complete COM
 message to be received. This setting does not apply to any network
 channels that you have configured for this server.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds that a connection is allowed to be
 idle before it is closed by the server. The T3 and T3S protocols
 ignore this attribute. If you configure network channels for this
 server, each channel can override this idle connection message
 timeout.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds an IIOP connection is allowed to
 be idle before it is closed by the server. This timeout helps guard
 against server deadlock through too many open connections.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds spent waiting for a complete IIOP
 message to be received. This timeout helps guard against denial of
 service attacks in which a caller indicates that they will be
 sending a message of a certain size which they never finish
 sending.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The time interval in milliseconds of the heartbeat period. A
 value of 0 indicates that heartbeats are turned off.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of idle periods until peer is considered
 unreachable
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The period of inactivity in milliseconds after which a RJVM is
 cleaned up. A value of 0 indicates that the RJVM never times
 out.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The time in milliseconds for which we are willing to wait for a
 response. A value of 0 indicates that we will wait till the
 response arrives.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of idle periods allowed before object is collected.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the kernel's SSL configuration. An SSL MBean is always
 linked to a particular Kernel and cannot be changed. Individual
 attributes on the SSL MBean may be changed, as documented, but the
 MBean itself may not.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the kernel's IIOP configuration. An IIOP MBean is always
 linked to a particular Kernel and cannot be changed. Individual
 attributes on the IIOP MBean may be changed, as documented, but the
 MBean itself may not.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the Log settings for this Kernel. An Log MBean is always
 linked to a particular Kernel and cannot be changed. Individual
 attributes on the Log MBean may be changed, as documented, but the
 MBean itself may not.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the server message log includes exceptions
 that are raised in remote systems.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the server returns stack traces for RMI calls
 that generate exceptions.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the execute queues configured for this server.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of open sockets allowed in server at a given
 point of time.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds that a thread must be continually working
 before this server considers the thread stuck.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds after which WebLogic Server periodically
 scans threads to see if they have been continually working for the
 configured maximum length of time.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Returns true if tracing is enabled
            
          
          
            
              Returns the size of the messaging bridge execute thread
 pool.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Returns the size of the MTU of the NIC.
            
          
          
            
              Sets the value of the LoadStubUsingContextClassLoader
 attribute.
            
          
          
            
              Sets the value of the RefreshClientRuntimeDescriptor
 attribute.
            
          
          
            
              The amount of time in milli seconds a reference should not be
 used after a request timed out. The clusterable ref avoids using
 this remote ref for the period specified.
            
          
          
            
              Backward compatibility mode to switch to 8.1 execute queues
 instead of WorkManagers. Each of the WorkManagers is converted to
 an individual execute queue. Setting this attribute requires a
 server restart.
 
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.KernelMBean Attribute=getT3ClientAbbrevTableSize)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.KernelMBean Attribute=getT3ServerAbbrevTableSize)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Enables gathered writes over NIO socket channels. Enabling this attribute increases efficiency 
 during I/O in environments with high network throughput and should be used only when configuring 
 a WebLogic domain for Oracle Exalogic. For more information, see "Enabling Exalogic-Specific Enhancements 
 in Oracle WebLogic Server 11g Release 1 (10.3.4)" in the Oracle Exalogic Deployment Guide.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.KernelMBean Attribute=isGatheredWritesEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              Enables scattered reads over NIO socket channels. Enabling this attribute increases efficiency during 
 I/O in environments with high network throughput and should be used only when configuring a WebLogic 
 domain for Oracle Exalogic. For more information, see "Enabling Exalogic-Specific Enhancements in 
 Oracle WebLogic Server 11g Release 1 (10.3.4)" in the Oracle Exalogic Deployment Guide.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.KernelMBean Attribute=isScatteredReadsEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              Enables increased efficiency of the self-tuning thread pool by aligning it with the Exalogic 
 processor architecture threading capabilities. Enabling this attribute increases efficiency 
 during I/O in environments with high network throughput and should be used only when configuring 
 a WebLogic domain for Oracle Exalogic. For more information, see "Enabling Exalogic-Specific Enhancements 
 in Oracle WebLogic Server 11g Release 1 (10.3.4)" in the Oracle Exalogic Deployment Guide.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.KernelMBean Attribute=isAddWorkManagerThreadsByCpuCount)
            
          
          
            
              Reduces lock contention by using concurrent buffer queue to park
 incoming requests. Enabling this attribute increases throughput as
 requests are scheduled with out acquiring any locks.
 
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SSLMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SSLMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Enables the use of native Java libraries.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether the server can be reached through the default
 SSL listen port.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates the cipher suites being used on a particular WebLogic
 Server.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the Java class that implements the
 <code>weblogic.security.acl.CertAuthenticator</code> class, which is
 deprecated in this release of WebLogic Server. This field is for
 Compatibility security only, and is only used when the Realm
 Adapter Authentication provider is configured.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the class that implements the
 <code>weblogic.security.SSL.HostnameVerifier</code> interface.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether to ignore the installed implementation of the
 <code>weblogic.security.SSL.HostnameVerifier</code> interface (when
 this server is acting as a client to another application
 server).
            
          
          
            
              The full directory location of the file that specifies the
 certificate authorities trusted by the server.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether or not the private key for the WebLogic Server
 has been encrypted with a password. This attribute is no longer
 used as of WebLogic Server version 7.0.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates the number of times WebLogic Server can use an
 exportable key between a domestic server and an exportable client
 before generating a new key. The more secure you want WebLogic
 Server to be, the fewer times the key should be used before
 generating a new key.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether or not clients must present digital
 certificates from a trusted certificate authority to WebLogic
 Server.
            
          
          
            
              The full directory location of the digital certificate file
 (<code>.der</code> or <code>.pem</code>) for the server.
            
          
          
            
              The TCP/IP port at which this server listens for SSL connection
 requests.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The full directory location and name of the file containing an
 ordered list of certificate authorities trusted by WebLogic
 Server.
            
          
          
            
              The number of certificates held that have not been redeemed by
 tokens.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Not used.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the number of milliseconds that WebLogic Server waits
 for an SSL connection before timing out. SSL connections take
 longer to negotiate than regular connections.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The full directory location of the private key file
 (<code>.der</code> or <code>.pem</code>) for the server.
            
          
          
            
              The form of SSL that should be used.
            
          
          
            
              The string alias used to store and retrieve the server's private
 key in the keystore. This private key is associated with the
 server's digital certificate.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SSLMBean Attribute=getServerPrivateKeyPassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether warning messages are logged in the server log
 when SSL connections are rejected.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates where SSL should find the server's identity
 (certificate and private key) as well as the server's trust
 (trusted CAs).
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Indicates the client certificate validation rules for inbound
 SSL.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Indicates the server certificate validation rules for outbound
 SSL.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Test if the AllowUnEncryptedNullCipher is enabled
            
          
          
            
              Sets whether the client should use the server certificates/key as the client
  identity when initiating an outbound connection over https.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SSLMBean Attribute=isUseServerCerts)
            
          
          
            
              Determines whether the SSL implementation in Weblogic Server is
 JSSE based.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SSLMBean Attribute=isJSSEEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              Determines whether to use the configured client SSL certificate as identity for
 outbound SSL connections.
 <p/>
 Note that to use a client SSL certificate, one must be specified
 in <code>{@link #setClientCertAlias}</code>.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SSLMBean Attribute=isUseClientCertForOutbound)
            
          
          
            
              Determines the alias of the client SSL certificate to be used as identity
 for outbound SSL connections. The certificate is assumed to be stored in the
 server configured keystore.
 <p/>
 Note that to use the client SSL certificate,
 <code>{@link #setUseClientCertForOutbound}</code> must be enabled.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SSLMBean Attribute=getClientCertAlias)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SSLMBean Attribute=getClientCertPrivateKeyPassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The string alias used to store and retrieve the outbound
 private key in the keystore. This private key is associated with
 either a server or a client digital certificate. This attribute value
 is derived from other settings and cannot be physically set.
            
          
          
            
              The passphrase used to retrieve the outbound private key from
 the keystore. This passphrase is assigned to the private key when
 it is generated. This attribute value is derived from
 other settings and cannot be physically set.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to IIOPMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.IIOPMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds an IIOP connection is allowed to
 be idle before it is closed by the server. This timeout helps guard
 against server deadlock through too many open connections.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds spent waiting for a complete IIOP
 message to be received. This timeout helps guard against denial of
 service attacks in which a caller indicates that they will be
 sending a message of a certain size which they never finish
 sending.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum IIOP message size allowable in a message header.
 This attribute attempts to prevent a denial of service attack
 whereby a caller attempts to force the server to allocate more
 memory than is available thereby keeping the server from responding
 quickly to other requests.
            
          
          
            
              The default GIOP (General Inter-ORB Protocol) version that this
 server will negotiate for incoming connections. (You may have to
 modify the default to work with other vendor's ORBs.)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specify whether outbound calls should use an initial
 LocateRequest.
            
          
          
            
              The transaction mechanism used by IIOP invocations. The default
 is the Object Transaction Service (OTS) required by J2EE 1.3.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specify how IIOP location forward host selection should be
 applied.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The wide character code set that this server will publish as its
 native code set. (Older ORBs may have trouble interoperating with
 anything other than the default.)
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The standard character code set that this server will publish as
 its native code set. (Older ORBs may have trouble interoperating
 with anything other than the default.)
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specify whether to use full Repository ID lists when sending
 value type information for custom-marshaled types. Full Repository
 ID lists allow C++ ORBS to truncate values to base types. For
 RMI-IIOP and Java ORBs doing this merely increases transmission
 overhead. JDK ORBs are known to have problems with these so setting
 this will prevent JDK ORB access from working.
            
          
          
            
              Specify whether to advertise RMI objects and EJBs as
 supporting stateful CSIv2. Stateful CSIv2 is more efficient
 than stateless, requiring only a single authentication step for
 each remote principal. Stateless CSIv2 requires per-request
 authentication. Stateful CSIv2 is not required by J2EE 1.3 and
 so some ORBs do not support it. Stateful CSIv2 is enabled by
 default. This property can be changed at the object-level by
 changing the object's &lt;stateful-authentication&gt; runtime
 descriptor property.
            
          
          
            
              Specify whether to advertise RMI objects and EJBs as
 supporting RMI-IIOP serial format version 2 for custom
 marshaled objects.
            
          
          
            
              Enable getior servlet used to publish COS Naming Service IORs
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.IIOPMBean Attribute=getEnableIORServlet)
            
          
          
            
              Specity whether to use java serialization for marshalling objects.
 Setting this property improves performance when marshalling objects 
 with very large object graphs.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.IIOPMBean Attribute=getUseJavaSerialization)
            
          
          
            
              Specify the value System Security. The following variables are affected.
 clientCertAuthentication, clientAuthentication, identityAssertion
 confidentiality, integrity. The value set in this MBean would only be picked up
 if the value set in RTD.xml is "config".
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.IIOPMBean Attribute=getSystemSecurity)
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ExecuteQueueMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ExecuteQueueMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The maximum number of simultaneous requests that this server can
 hold in the queue.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The priority of the threads associated with this queue.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of threads assigned to this queue.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The percentage of the Queue Length size that can be reached
 before this server indicates an overflow condition for the
 queue. If the overflow condition is reached and the current thread
 count has not reached the ThreadsMaximum value, then ThreadsIncrease
 number of threads are added.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the number of threads to increase the queue length when the
 queue length theshold is reached. This threshold is determined
 by the QueueLengthThresholdPercent value.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of threads that this queue is allowed to
 have; this value prevents WebLogic Server from creating an overly
 high thread count in the queue in response to continual overflow
 conditions.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The minimum number of threads that WebLogic Server will maintain
 in the queue.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to COMMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.COMMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The address of the primary domain controller this server uses
 for authenticating clients. (If not specified, COM clients will not
 be authenticated.)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this server should use native DLLs to allow
 Java objects to interact with COM objects. (Supported on Windows
 only.)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether verbose logging is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this server should log memory usage.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this server should prefetch the next element
 in a <tt>java.lang.Enumeration</tt> (that had been improperly
 converted from a COM <tt>VariantEnumeration</tt> type) so the
 correct value is returned when the <tt>hasMoreElements()</tt>
 method is called.
            
          
          
            
              Controls the flag that is used to initialize COM in native
 mode.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ServerDebugMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerDebugMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Indicates whether or not context based debugging is enabled.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Indicates the dye mask for criteria used to determine whether the debug will be emitted.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerDebugMBean Attribute=getServerAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Debug listenThread processing
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerDebugMBean Attribute=isMagicThreadDumpEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerDebugMBean Attribute=getMagicThreadDumpHost)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerDebugMBean Attribute=getMagicThreadDumpFile)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerDebugMBean Attribute=getMagicThreadDumpBackToSocket)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerDebugMBean Attribute=getBugReportServiceWsdlUrl)
            
          
          
            
              Debug Application Container processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug application library processing
            
          
          
            
              Gets the DebugClassRedef attribute of ServerDebugMBean
            
          
          
            
              Gets the fastswap RedefiningClassLoader debug attribute of ServerDebugMBean
            
          
          
            
              Gets the fastswap DebugClassSize debug attribute of ServerDebugMBean
            
          
          
            
              Gets the fastswap DefaultStore debug attribute of ServerDebugMBean
            
          
          
            
              Gets the fastswap ClassChangeNotifier debug attribute of ServerDebugMBean
            
          
          
            
              Debug WebApp Container HTTP processing.
            
          
          
            
              Debug URL resolution for incoming http requests
            
          
          
            
              Debug Http Session management in the webapp container.
            
          
          
            
              Debug log manager in the webapp container.
            
          
          
            
              Debug identity assertion flow when identity assertion occurs in the
 webapp container.
            
          
          
            
              Debug webapp security
            
          
          
            
              Debug WebApp Module deployment callbacks
            
          
          
            
              Debug EJB compilation
            
          
          
            
              Debug EJB deployment
            
          
          
            
              Debug EJB MDB Connection processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug EJB Caching
            
          
          
            
              Debug EJB Swapping
            
          
          
            
              Debug EJB locking
            
          
          
            
              Debug EJB pooling
            
          
          
            
              Debug EJB Timer processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug EJB invocation processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug EJB Security
            
          
          
            
              Debug EJB CMP deployment processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug EJB CMP runtime processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Event Manager processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug low-level Server Migration processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug for each fragment that is sent or received by multicast.
            
          
          
            
              Debug each GroupMessage that is sent or received by
 multicast.
            
          
          
            
              Debug each cluster Heartbeat that is sent or received by multicast.
            
          
          
            
              Debug each Announcement, StateDump, and Attributes message that
 is sent or received by multicast.
            
          
          
            
              Debug cluster replication information.
            
          
          
            
              Debug low-level cluster replication information.
            
          
          
            
              Debug async replication/persistence information.
            
          
          
            
              Debug the cluster leader election messages.
            
          
          
            
              Debug Data replication service (DRS) API calls.
            
          
          
            
              Debug DRS Heartbeats.
            
          
          
            
              Debug DRS Message traffic.
            
          
          
            
              Debug DRS Update status processing.
            
          
          
            
              Debug DRS State transitions.
            
          
          
            
              Debug DRS Queueing traffic.
            
          
          
            
              Debug basic naming service machinery.
            
          
          
            
              Debug naming service name resolution.
            
          
          
            
              Debug JNDI state and object factories.
            
          
          
            
              Debug HTTP tunneling connection timed out processing.
            
          
          
            
              Debug HTTP tunneling connection open/close processing.
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMSBackEnd processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMSFrontEnd processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMSCommon processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMSConfig processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMS Distributed Topic processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMS Lock processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMS XA processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMS Dispatcher processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMS Store operations
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMS boot operations
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMS durable subscriber operations
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMS JDBC store scavenge mode processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMS AME processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMS Pause/Resume processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMSModule deployment processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMS MessagePath processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMS SAF processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug the pooling and wrapping of JMS connections, sessions, and other
 objects. This feature is enabled when a JMS connection factory, from
 any vendor, is used inside an EJB or a servlet using the 
 "resource-reference" element in the deployment descriptor.
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMS CDS processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA XA resources
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA non-XA resources
            
          
          
            
              Detailed Debug of JTA XA processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA RMI processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA 2PC processing
            
          
          
            
              Detailed Debug of JTA 2PC processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA transaction log processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA JDBC processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA Recovery processing
            
          
          
            
              Detailed debug of JTA Recovery processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA external API
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA transaction propagation
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA imported transactions
            
          
          
            
              Detailed debug of JTA imported transactions
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA naming
            
          
          
            
              Detailed debug of JTA naming
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA resource health
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA TLOG Migration
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA ServerLifecycle
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA Logging Last Resource 
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA Health Monitoring
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA Transaction name filter processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JTA Resource name filter
            
          
          
            
              Debugging for the messaging kernel. The messaging kernel is low-
 level messaging code that is used by the JMS and store and forward
 subsystems.
            
          
          
            
              Debugging for the messaging kernel as the server is being rebooted.
 This provides detailed information on every persistent message
 that is recovered.
            
          
          
            
              Debug Messaging SAF Lifecycle.
            
          
          
            
              Debug Messaging SAF Admin.
            
          
          
            
              Debug Messaging SAF Manager.
            
          
          
            
              Debug Messaging SAF SendingAgent.
            
          
          
            
              Debug Messaging SAF ReceivingAgent.
            
          
          
            
              Debug Messaging SAF Transport.
            
          
          
            
              Debug Messaging SAF MessagePath.
            
          
          
            
              Debug Messaging SAF Store.
            
          
          
            
              Detailed debug of Messaging SAF.
            
          
          
            
              Debug the Path Service
            
          
          
            
              Detailed debug for the Path Service
            
          
          
            
              Debug Weblogic SCA Container 
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Realm processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security service manager
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Password Guessing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security User Lockout processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Service
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework predicate processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security SSL and TLS processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security SSL and TLS exception processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security PKI X.509 certificate revocation checking
            
          
          
            
              Debug Embedded LDAP processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Embedded LDAP processing (output to console)
            
          
          
            
              Debug Embedded LDAP processing (log level)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Embedded LDAP Write All Overrides to Property Files
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework Adjudication processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework Atn processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework Atz processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework Auditor processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework Credential Mapper processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework Encryption Service processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework KeyStore processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework CertPath processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework Role Mapping
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework Entitlements Engine processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework JACC processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework JACC nonPolicy processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework JACC Policy processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework SAML library processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework SAML Provider atn processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework SAML Provider credential mapper processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework SAML SSO profile services
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework SAML2 library processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework SAML2 Provider atn processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework SAML2 Provider credential mapper processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Security Framework SAML2 SSO profile services
            
          
          
            
              Debug JDBC Connection setup/teardown processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JDBC SQL processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JDBC RMI processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JDBC DriverLogging processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JDBC Internal processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Oracle RAC processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug ONS client 
            
          
          
            
              Debug Oracle UCP processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug REPLAY client 
            
          
          
            
              Debug Messaging Bridge start up processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Messaging Bridge runtime processing
            
          
          
            
              Detailed debug of Messaging Bridge runtime processing
            
          
          
            
              Not Used
            
          
          
            
              Not Used
            
          
          
            
              Debug persistent store high-level logical
 operations, such as read, write, delete, and update.
 Multiple logical operations may occur in a single physical
 operation.
            
          
          
            
              Debug persistent store logical boot
 operations (lists all recovered records).
            
          
          
            
              Debugging for persistent store low-level physical
 operations which typically directly correspond to file or
 JDBC operations.
 Multiple logical operations may occur in a single physical
 operation.
            
          
          
            
              Detailed debug for persistent store low-level physical
 operations which typically directly correspond to file or
 JDBC operations.
            
          
          
            
              Debug persistent store resource
 manager transaction activity, includes tracing
 for the related operations of layered subsystems (such as JMS).
            
          
          
            
              Detailed debug of persistent store resource
 manager transaction activity, includes tracing
 for the related operations of layered subsystems (such as JMS).
            
          
          
            
              Debug the persistent store's administration code. This
 will produce debug events when instances of the store are created and
 deleted, and when the server is booted.
            
          
          
            
              XML Registry debugging option: Debug levels
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              XML Registry debugging option: Debug name
            
          
          
            
              XML Registry debugging option: Debug IncludeTime
            
          
          
            
              XML Registry debugging option: Debug IncludeName
            
          
          
            
              XML Registry debugging option: Debug IncludeClass
            
          
          
            
              XML Registry debugging option: Debug IncludeLocation
            
          
          
            
              XML Registry debugging option: Debug UseShortClass
            
          
          
            
              JAXP debugging option: Debug level
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              JAXP debugging option: Debug name
            
          
          
            
              JAXP debugging option: Debug IncludeTime
            
          
          
            
              JAXP debugging option: Debug IncludeName
            
          
          
            
              JAXP debugging option: Debug IncludeClass
            
          
          
            
              JAXP debugging option: Debug IncludeLocation
            
          
          
            
              JAXP debugging option: Debug UseShortClass
            
          
          
            
              XMLEntityCache debugging option: Debug level
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              XMLEntityCache debugging option: Debug name
            
          
          
            
              XMLEntityCache debugging option: Debug IncludeTime
            
          
          
            
              XMLEntityCache debugging option: Debug IncludeName
            
          
          
            
              XMLEntityCache debugging option: Debug IncludeClass
            
          
          
            
              XMLEntityCache debugging option: Debug IncludeLocation
            
          
          
            
              XMLEntityCache debugging option: Debug UseShortClass
            
          
          
            
              Debug deploy command processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug deployment processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug deployment service processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug deployment service status update processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug internal deployment service processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug deployment service transport processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug deployment service HTTP transport processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Master Deployer processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Slave Deployer processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Application Container deployment processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug ClassFinder processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug ClassPathServlet processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug WebModule processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug ClassLoader processing
            
          
          
            
              Detailed debug of ClassLoader processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug WebApp ClassLoader processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug the bootstrap servlet that runs
 on the Admin Server and is invoked over HTTP by a booting managed
 server.
            
          
          
            
              Debug the file distribution servlet that runs
 on the Admin Server and is invoked over HTTP by a booting managed
 server.
            
          
          
            
              Debug diagnostic lifecycle handler processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug data gathering processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug diagnostic instrumentation processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug instrumentation weaving
            
          
          
            
              Debug instrumentation weaving for matches only
            
          
          
            
              Debug instrumentation actions/monitors
            
          
          
            
              Debug instrumentation event records
            
          
          
            
              Debug instrumentation configuration processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug diagnostic archive processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug diagnostic file archive processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug diagnostic wlstore archive processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug diagnostic jdbc archive processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug diagnostic archive retirement processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug diagnostic module processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug diagnostic harvester processing
            
          
          
            
              Detailed debug of diagnostic harvester processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug MBean harvester processing.
            
          
          
            
              Debug tree bean harvester processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug diagnostic image processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug diagnostic query processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug diagnostic accessor processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug diagnostic collection processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug diagnostic context processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug the SNMP vendor toolkit implementation.
            
          
          
            
              Debug the SNMP agent framework.
            
          
          
            
              Debug the SNMP TCP protocol handler.
            
          
          
            
               The debug attribute to enable or disable the SNMP Agent Extension
 Provider discovery and initialization. 
            
          
          
            
              Debug Domain Log Handler processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug log configuration processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug diagnostic watch processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug J2EE Resource Adapter pool management (size management) processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Resource Adapter XA general/top-level processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Resource Adapter XA incoming message processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Resource Adapter XA outgoing message processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Resource Adapter XA Work request processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Resource Adapter local tx outgoing message processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug ResourceAdapter Lifecycle processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug connector service action processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Resource Adapter (un)deploy, security id settings
            
          
          
            
              Debug Resource Adapter descriptor parsing
            
          
          
            
              Debug setup of resource ref processing (container and application managed
 security set by calling application components)
            
          
          
            
              Debug Resource Adapter operations on a connection pool (proxy testing)
            
          
          
            
              Debug Resource Adapter outbound connection operations (get, close, associate,
 disassociate, ping)
            
          
          
            
              Debug Resource Adapter connection event processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Resource Adapter Work submission and cancel processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Resource Adapter work event processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Resource Adapter class loading
            
          
          
            
              Debug low-level wan replication processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMX processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug core JMX processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMX runtime service processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMX domain service processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMX edit service processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JMX CompatibilityMBeanServer service processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug management configuration edit processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug management configuration runtime processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug J2EE management processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug IIOP CosNaming processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug IIOP tunnelling
            
          
          
            
              Debug cluster consensus lease processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Server ServerLifeCycle processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug WTC configuration processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug WTC XATMI Message processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug WTC user data processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug WTC gwt execution
            
          
          
            
              Debug WTC jatmi execution
            
          
          
            
              Debug WTC corba execution
            
          
          
            
              Debug WTC tBridge execution
            
          
          
            
              Debug JPA MetaData processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JPA post-compilation
            
          
          
            
              Debug JPA runtime diagnostics
            
          
          
            
              Debug JPA Query processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug JPA data cache
            
          
          
            
              Debug JPA tools
            
          
          
            
              Debug JPA management and monitoring
            
          
          
            
              Debug JPA profiling
            
          
          
            
              Debug JPA RDBMS SQL interaction
            
          
          
            
              Debug JPA RDBMS JDBC interaction
            
          
          
            
              Debug JPA RDBMS schema manipulation
            
          
          
            
              Debug DebugJMST3Server processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug descriptor framework processing
            
          
          
            
               If statistics about server start will be logged after the running message.
            
          
          
            
              Debug Management Services Resources
            
          
          
            
              Debug deployment plan processing
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to KernelDebugMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.KernelDebugMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Debug abbreviations over JVM to JVM connections
            
          
          
            
              Debug JVM to JVM connections
            
          
          
            
              Debug messages sent over JVM to JVM connections
            
          
          
            
              Debug routing of messages over JVM to JVM connections
            
          
          
            
              Debug stub-level load-balancing processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Work context (out of band data propagation)
            
          
          
            
              Debug stub-level fail-over processing
            
          
          
            
              Force VM garbage collection on each DGC interval
            
          
          
            
              Debug each DGC enrollment.
            
          
          
            
              Debug DGC with Statistics
            
          
          
            
              Debug SSL processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug RC4 cipher processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug RSA security processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Muxer processing
            
          
          
            
              Detailed debug for Muxer processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Muxer timeout processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Muxer connection processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug Muxer exception processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug IIOP processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug IIOP message processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug buffer-level IIOP processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug IIOP security processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug IIOP Object Transaction Service (OTS) processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug IIOP object replacement processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug IIOP connection management processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug IIOP startup processing
            
          
          
            
              Debug WorkManager self-tuning processing
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to DebugMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DebugMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Gets the configured DebugScopes for this debug bean.
 The debug scopes contain the enabled state for a scope
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DebugMBean Attribute=getDebugScopes)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to NetworkAccessPointMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NetworkAccessPointMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The protocol this network channel should use for
 connections.
            
          
          
            
              The IP address or DNS name this network channel uses to listen
 for incoming connections. A value of <tt>null</tt> indicates that
 the network channel should obtain this value from the server's
 configuration.
            
          
          
            
              The IP address or DNS name representing the external identity of
 this network channel. A value of <tt>null</tt> indicates that the
 network channel's Listen Address is also its external address. If
 the Listen Address is <tt>null,</tt>the network channel obtains its
 external identity from the server's configuration.
            
          
          
            
              The default TCP port this network channel uses to listen for
 regular (non-SSL) incoming connections. A value of <tt>-1</tt>
 indicates that the network channel should obtain this value from
 the server's configuration.
            
          
          
            
              The externally published listen port for this network channel. A
 value of <tt>-1</tt> indicates that the network channel's Listen
 Port is also its public listen port. If the Listen Port is
 <tt>-1,</tt>the network channel obtains its public listen port from
 the server's configuration.
            
          
          
            
              The IP address or DNS name of the HTTP proxy to use for
 outbound connections on this channel. The HTTP proxy must
 support the CONNECT tunneling command.
            
          
          
            
              The port of the HTTP proxy to use for outbound connections
 on this channel. The HTTP proxy must support the CONNECT
 tunneling command.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether HTTP traffic should be allowed over this
 network channel.
            
          
          
            
              The number of backlogged, new TCP connection requests that this
 network channel allows. A value of <tt>-1</tt> indicates that the
 network channel obtains its backlog configuration from the server's
 configuration.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum back off time between failures while accepting
 client connections. -1 implies that this value is inherited from
 the server.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The amount of time that this network channel should wait for a
 connection before timing out. A value of <code>0</code> disables
 network channel login timeout. A value of <tt>-1</tt> indicates
 that the network channel obtains this timeout value from the
 server's configuration.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The interval (in seconds) at which this network channel should
 ping an HTTP-tunneled client to see if its still alive. A value of
 <tt>-1</tt> indicates that the network channel obtains this
 interval from the ServerMBean. (Requires you to enable
 tunneling for the network channel.)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The amount of time (in seconds) after which this network channel
 considers a missing HTTP-tunneled client to be dead. A value of
 <tt>-1</tt> indicates that the network channel obtains this timeout
 value from the ServerMBean. (Requires you to enable
 tunneling for the network channel.)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether tunneling via HTTP should be enabled for this
 network channel. This value is not inherited from the server's
 configuration.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum amount of time this network channel waits for a
 complete message to be received. A value of <code>0</code> disables
 network channel complete message timeout. A value of <tt>-1</tt>
 indicates that the network channel obtains this timeout value from
 the ServerMBean.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Determines if connections with pending responses are allowed
 to timeout. It defaults to false. If set to true, the
 connection will be timed out for this channel if it exceeds the
 idleConnectionTimeout value.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum amount of time (in seconds) that a connection is
 allowed to be idle before it is closed by this network channel. A
 value of <tt>-1</tt> indicates that the network channel obtains
 this timeout value from the ServerMBean.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The amount of time that this network channel should wait to
 establish an outbound socket connection before timing out. A
 value of <code>0</code> disables network channel connect
 timeout.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum message size allowable in a message header.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether new server-to-server connections may
 consider this network channel when initiating a
 connection. This is only relevant if the connection needs to be
 bound to the network channel's listen address. This will only
 work for binary protocols that support both outbound and
 inbound traffic.
            
          
          
            
              A weight to give this channel when creating server-to-server
 connections.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The address this network channel uses to generate EJB handles
 and failover addresses for use in a cluster. This value is determined
 according to the following order of precedence:
 <ol>
 <li>If the cluster address is specified via the NAPMBean, then that value is used</li>
 <li>If this value is not specified, the value of PublicAddress is used.
 <li>If PublicAddress is not set, this value is derive from the ClusterAddress attribute
 of the ClusterMbean.</li>
 <li>If ClusterMbean.clusterAddress is not set, this value is derive from the listen address
 of the NAPMbean.</li>
 
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this channel should be started.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of clients that can be connected on this
 network channel.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this network channel uses two way SSL.
            
          
          
            
              <p>Whether or not the channel's custom identity should be used.
 This setting only has an effect if the server is using a customized
 keystore. By default the channel's identity is inherited from the server's
 identity.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NetworkAccessPointMBean Attribute=isChannelIdentityCustomized)
            
          
          
            
              The string alias used to store and retrieve the channel's
 private key in the keystore. This private key is associated with
 the server's digital certificate. A value of <tt>null</tt>
 indicates that the network channel uses the alias specified in the
 server's SSL configuration.
            
          
          
            
              The string alias used to store and retrieve the channel's
 private key in the keystore. This private key is associated with
 the server's digital certificate. This value is derived from
 other settings on the channel and cannot be physically set.
            
          
          
            
              The passphrase used to retrieve the server's private key from
 the keystore. This passphrase is assigned to the private key when
 it is generated. This value is derived from
 other settings on the channel and cannot be physically set.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NetworkAccessPointMBean Attribute=getCustomPrivateKeyPassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether clients must present digital certificates from
 a trusted certificate authority to WebLogic Server on this
 channel.
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies whether the identity specifed by {@link #getCustomPrivateKeyAlias}
 should be used for outbound SSL connections on this channel. In
 normal circumstances the outbound identity is determined by the
 caller's environment.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NetworkAccessPointMBean Attribute=isOutboundPrivateKeyEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies whether to use non-standard object serialization for
 performance. This option works in different ways for different
 protocols. In particular under IIOP this option uses Java
 serialization rather than RMI-IIOP serialization. In general
 using non-standard serialization is not suitable for interop
 scenarios and may imply some feature loss.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NetworkAccessPointMBean Attribute=getUseFastSerialization)
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds an IIOP connection is allowed to
 be idle before it is closed by the server. A value of <tt>-1</tt>
 indicates that the network channel obtains this timeout value from
 the IIOPMBean or ServerMBean.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The SSL listen port for the channel. -1 implies that this value
 is inherited from the channel.
            
          
          
            
              The external DNSName for the current server, which will be sent
 with the session cookies and also with the dynamic server lists to
 the proxies. This will be required for the configurations in which
 you have firewall doing Network Address Translations A value of
 null indicates that this value is inherited from the server
            
          
          
            
              Duration allowed for an SSL login sequence. If the duration is
 exceeded, the login is timed out. A value of 0 disables the channel login timeout.
 Setting this to -1 implies that this value is inherited from the SSLMBean.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds spent waiting for a complete T3
 message to be received. This attribute helps guard against denial
 of service attacks in which a caller indicates that they will be
 sending a message of a certain size which they never finish
 sending. -1 implies that this value is inherited from the
 KernelMBean.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds spent waiting for a complete HTTP
 message to be received. This attribute helps guard against denial
 of service attacks in which a caller indicates that they will be
 sending a message of a certain size which they never finish
 sending. -1 implies that this value is inherited from the
 KernelMBean.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds spent waiting for a complete COM
 message to be received. This attribute helps guard against denial
 of service attacks in which a caller indicates that they will be
 sending a message of a certain size which they never finish
 sending. -1 implies that this value is inherited from the
 KernelMBean.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of seconds spent waiting for a complete IIOP
 message to be received. This attribute helps guard against denial
 of service attacks in which a caller indicates that they will be
 sending a message of a certain size which they never finish
 sending. -1 implies that this value is inherited from the
 channel.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NetworkAccessPointMBean Attribute=getCustomPropertiesAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Enables Socket Direct Protocol (SDP) on this channel. Enable this attribute when configuring 
 session replication enhancements for Managed Servers in a WebLogic cluster for Oracle Exalogic. 
 For more information, see "Enabling Exalogic-Specific Enhancements in Oracle WebLogic Server 11g Release 1 (10.3.4)"
 in the Oracle Exalogic Deployment Guide.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NetworkAccessPointMBean Attribute=isSDPEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              The string alias used to store and retrieve the outbound
 private key in the keystore. This private key is associated with
 either a server or a client digital certificate. This attribute value is
 derived from other settings and cannot be physically set.
            
          
          
            
              The passphrase used to retrieve the outbound private key from
 the keystore. This passphrase is assigned to the private key when
 it is generated. This attribute value is derived from
 other settings and cannot be physically set.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ServerStartMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerStartMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The Java Vendor value to use when starting this server
 For example, <code>BEA, Sun, HP etc </code> 
            
          
          
            
              The Java home directory (path on the machine running Node
 Manager) to use when starting this server.
            
          
          
            
              The classpath (path on the machine running Node Manager) to use
 when starting this server.
            
          
          
            
              The BEA home directory (path on the machine running Node
 Manager) to use when starting this server.
            
          
          
            
              The directory that this server uses as its root directory. This
 directory must be on the computer that hosts the Node Manager. If
 you do not specify a Root Directory value, the domain directory
 is used by default.
 
            
          
          
            
              The security policy file (directory and filename on the machine
 running Node Manager) to use when starting this server.
            
          
          
            
              The arguments to use when starting this server.
            
          
          
            
              This value is not used by any process.  The attributes on this mbean
 should be used for properties of the server itself, and this refers to
 a nodemanager property.  ServerMBean.restartMax should be used instead
 
            
          
          
            
              The user name to use when booting this server.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ServerStartMBean Attribute=getPasswordEncryptedAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JTAMigratableTargetMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JTAMigratableTargetMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Whether continue to boot if cannot find the current owner of TRS to do 
 failback. This attribute is only meaningful for servers in cluster. 
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to MigratableTargetMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MigratableTargetMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MigratableTargetMBean Attribute=getConstrainedCandidateServersAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MigratableTargetMBean Attribute=getClusterAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MigratableTargetMBean Attribute=getDestinationServerAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Defines the type of migration policy to use for the services hosted by this migratable target. 
 Valid options are:
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the path to the pre-migration script to run before 
 a migratable target is actually activated. The script <i>must</i> be in the 
 <code><i>MIDDLEWARE_HOME</i>/user_projects/domains/<i>mydomain</i>/bin/service_migration</code> directory.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the path to the post-migration script to run after a migratable target is fully
 deactivated. The script <i>must</i> be in the 
 <code><i>MIDDLEWARE_HOME</i>/user_projects/domains/<i>mydomain</i>/bin/service_migration</code> directory.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether or not a failure during execution of the post-deactivation script is fatal to the migration.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether or not the post-deactivation script is allowed to run on a different machine.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether or not a failed service will first be deactivated and reactivated in place,
 instead of being migrated.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies how many seconds to wait in between attempts to restart the failed service.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies how many restart attempts to make before migrating the failed service.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SingletonServiceBaseMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingletonServiceBaseMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingletonServiceBaseMBean Attribute=getHostingServerAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingletonServiceBaseMBean Attribute=getUserPreferredServerAsString)
            
          
          
            
              A migratable service could fail to come up on every possible
 configured server. This attribute controls how many further
 attempts, after the service has failed on every server at least
 once, should be tried. Note that each attempt specified here
 indicates another full circuit of migrations amongst all the
 configured servers. So for a 3-server cluster, and a value of 2, a
 total of 4 additional migrations will be attempted. (the original
 server is never a valid destination)
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingletonServiceBaseMBean Attribute=getAdditionalMigrationAttempts)
            
          
          
            
              Controls how long of a pause there should be between the
 migration attempts described in
 getAdditionalMigrationAttempts(). Note that this delay only
 happens when the service has failed to come up on every
 server. It does not cause any sort of delay between attempts to
 migrate otherwise.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingletonServiceBaseMBean Attribute=getMillisToSleepBetweenAttempts)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to DefaultFileStoreMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DefaultFileStoreMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SingleSignOnServicesMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingleSignOnServicesMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The contact person given (first) name.
            
          
          
            
              The contact person surname (last name).
            
          
          
            
              The contact person type.
            
          
          
            
              The contact person's company name.
            
          
          
            
              The contact person's telephone number.
            
          
          
            
              The contact person's e-mail address.
            
          
          
            
              The organization name.
            
          
          
            
              The organization URL.
            
          
          
            
              The published site URL.
            
          
          
            
              The string that uniquely identifies the local site.
            
          
          
            
              Gets the Error Path URL.  Partner sites may redirect users
 to this URL for more information if SSO fails.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingleSignOnServicesMBean Attribute=getErrorPath)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the local site is enabled for the Service Provider 
 role.
            
          
          
            
              The Service Provider's default URL.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Artifact binding is enabled for the Service Provider.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingleSignOnServicesMBean Attribute=isServiceProviderArtifactBindingEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the POST binding is enabled for the Service Provider.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingleSignOnServicesMBean Attribute=isServiceProviderPOSTBindingEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the preferred binding type for endpoints of Service Provider services.
 Must be set to "None", "POST", or "Artifact".
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingleSignOnServicesMBean Attribute=getServiceProviderPreferredBinding)
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether authentication requests must be signed.  If set, all outgoing
 authentication requests are signed.
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies whether incoming SAML 2.0 assertions must be signed.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingleSignOnServicesMBean Attribute=isWantAssertionsSigned)
            
          
          
            
              The keystore alias for the key to be used when signing documents.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingleSignOnServicesMBean Attribute=getSSOSigningKeyPassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Identity Provider must authenticate users directly 
 and not use a previous security context. The default is <code>false</code>. 
            
          
          
            
              Determines whether the Identity Provider and the user must not
 take control of the user interface from the requester and interact with the user in a 
 noticeable fashion. The default setting is <code>false</code>.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the local site is enabled for the Identity Provider 
 role.
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies whether the Artifact binding is enabled for the Identity Provider.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingleSignOnServicesMBean Attribute=isIdentityProviderArtifactBindingEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies whether the POST binding is enabled for the Identity Provider.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingleSignOnServicesMBean Attribute=isIdentityProviderPOSTBindingEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies whether the Redirect binding is enabled for the Identity Provider.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingleSignOnServicesMBean Attribute=isIdentityProviderRedirectBindingEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the preferred binding type for endpoints of the Identity Provider services.
 Must be set to <code>None</code>, <code>HTTP/POST</code>, <code>HTTP/Artifact</code>, or <code>HTTP/Redirect</code>.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The URL of the login form web application to which unauthenticated requests are directed.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The name of the query parameter to be used for conveying the login-return URL to the login form web application.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingleSignOnServicesMBean Attribute=getLoginReturnQueryParameter)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether incoming authentication requests must be signed. If set, authentication requests that
 are not signed are not accepted.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingleSignOnServicesMBean Attribute=isWantAuthnRequestsSigned)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the recipient/destination check is enabled. When true, the recipient of
  the SAML Request/Response must match the URL in the HTTP Request.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the POST one-use check is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              The string alias used to store and retrieve the server's private key, which is used to
 establish outgoing TLS/SSL connections.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingleSignOnServicesMBean Attribute=getTransportLayerSecurityKeyPassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The username that is used to assign Basic authentication credentials to outgoing HTTPS connections.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingleSignOnServicesMBean Attribute=getBasicAuthUsername)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingleSignOnServicesMBean Attribute=getBasicAuthPasswordEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether incoming artifact requests must be signed. 
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether TLS/SSL client authentication is required.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether Basic Authentication client authentication is required.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum size of the authentication request cache.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum timeout (in seconds) of &lt;AuthnRequest&gt; documents stored in the local cache.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum size of the artifact cache.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum timeout (in seconds) of artifacts stored in the local cache.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the persistent cache (LDAP or RDBMS) is used for
 storing SAML 2.0 artifacts and authentication requests.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebServiceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              For use only with the JAX-RPC stack. For JAX-WS, use
 WebServiceBufferingMBean instead.
 <p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceMBean Attribute=getJmsConnectionFactory)
            
          
          
            
              For use only with the JAX-RPC stack. For JAX-WS, use
 WebServiceBufferingMBean instead.
 <p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceMBean Attribute=getMessagingQueue)
            
          
          
            
              For use only with the JAX-RPC stack. For JAX-WS, use
 WebServiceBufferingMBean instead.
 <p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceMBean Attribute=getMessagingQueueMDBRunAsPrincipalName)
            
          
          
            
              For use only with the JAX-RPC stack. For JAX-WS, use
 WebServiceBufferingMBean instead.
 <p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceMBean Attribute=getCallbackQueue)
            
          
          
            
              For use only with the JAX-RPC stack. For JAX-WS, use
 WebServiceBufferingMBean instead.
 <p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceMBean Attribute=getCallbackQueueMDBRunAsPrincipalName)
            
          
          
            
              Get persistence config for this server.
 <p>
 NOTE: Not used by the JAX-RPC stack.
 </p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceMBean Attribute=getWebServicePersistence)
            
          
          
            
              Get buffering config for this server.
 <p>
 NOTE: Not used by the JAX-RPC stack.
 </p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceMBean Attribute=getWebServiceBuffering)
            
          
          
            
              Get reliability config for this server.
 <p>
 NOTE: Not used by the JAX-RPC stack.
 </p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceMBean Attribute=getWebServiceReliability)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebServicePersistenceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServicePersistenceMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Get the name of the logical store to use, by default, for all
 web services persistent state in this server.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServicePersistenceMBean Attribute=getDefaultLogicalStoreName)
            
          
          
            
              Get an array of all defined logical stores for this VM (non-WLS).
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServicePersistenceMBean Attribute=getWebServiceLogicalStores)
            
          
          
            
              Get an array of all defined physical stores for this VM (non-WLS).
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServicePersistenceMBean Attribute=getWebServicePhysicalStores)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebServiceLogicalStoreMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceLogicalStoreMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Get the persistence strategy in use by this logical store. Any physical
 store configured for use with this logical store should support this
 strategy.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceLogicalStoreMBean Attribute=getPersistenceStrategy)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Get the interval at which the persistent store will be cleaned
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceLogicalStoreMBean Attribute=getCleanerInterval)
            
          
          
            
              Get the default max time an object can remain in the store. This can be
 overridden on individual objects placed in the store (internally, but not via
 this API).
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceLogicalStoreMBean Attribute=getDefaultMaximumObjectLifetime)
            
          
          
            
              Get the JNDI name of the buffering queue that web services should use.
 (Both for buffering and to
 find the physical store for this logical store). Defaults to "" to indicate
 the PhysicalStoreName property should be used.
 <p>
 This property is ignored if persistence strategy is IN_MEMORY.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceLogicalStoreMBean Attribute=getRequestBufferingQueueJndiName)
            
          
          
            
              Get the JNDI name of the response buffering queue that web services should
 use. If this is null, the request buffering queue is used.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceLogicalStoreMBean Attribute=getResponseBufferingQueueJndiName)
            
          
          
            
              Get the name of the physical store to be used by this logical store. This
 property is recommended for use only when running off server or in other
 cases where a buffering queue JNDI name cannot be set via
 setBufferingQueueJndiName. If a buffering queue JNDI name is set to a
 non-null/non-empty value, this property is ignored. Defaults to "" to
 indicate the default WLS file store should be used.
 <p>
 This property is ignored if persistence strategy is IN_MEMORY.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceLogicalStoreMBean Attribute=getPhysicalStoreName)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebServicePhysicalStoreMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServicePhysicalStoreMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Get the type of this physical store.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServicePhysicalStoreMBean Attribute=getStoreType)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              For file stores, specifies the directory that will hold all files
 related to the store. The actual file names are controlled internally by
 the file store implementation. For other types of stores, this location may
 be a URL or URI, or other description string.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServicePhysicalStoreMBean Attribute=getLocation)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the algorithm used when performing synchronous writes to the
 physical store.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServicePhysicalStoreMBean Attribute=getSynchronousWritePolicy)
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebServiceReliabilityMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceReliabilityMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The interval of time that must pass before a message will be retransmitted to the
 RM destination (in the event a prior transmission failed). String value in
 ‘Duration’ format. Defaults to ‘P0DT3S’ (3 seconds). Set at sequence creation
 time, and cannot be reset.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceReliabilityMBean Attribute=getBaseRetransmissionInterval)
            
          
          
            
              A boolean flag indicating that the retransmission interval will be adjusted using
 the exponential backoff algorithm ([Tanenbaum]). Defaults to false. Set at
 sequence creation time, and cannot be reset.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceReliabilityMBean Attribute=isRetransmissionExponentialBackoff)
            
          
          
            
              A boolean flag indicating that RM sources, by default, will send
 non-buffered. Defaults to false. Note, changes to this default will
 only be picked up by new reliable sequences. Existing reliable sequences
 have their persistence handling set at creation time and these values will
 not change.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceReliabilityMBean Attribute=isNonBufferedSource)
            
          
          
            
              The maximum time a pending acknowledgement (set after the destination accepts a message) can
 wait before being delivered back to the RM source. String value in ‘Duration’
 format. Defaults to ‘P0DT0.2S (200 milliseconds). Set at sequence creation time,
 and cannot be reset.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceReliabilityMBean Attribute=getAcknowledgementInterval)
            
          
          
            
              If during this duration, an endpoint (RM source or RM destination) has received
 no application or control messages, the endpoint MAY consider the RM Sequence to
 have been terminated due to inactivity. String value in ‘Duration’ format.
 Defaults to ‘P0DT600S’ (600 seconds). Implementations of RM source and RM
 destination are free to manage resources associated with the sequence as they
 please, but in general, there are no guarantees that the sequence will be useable
 by either party after the inactivity timeout expires. Set at sequence creation
 time, and cannot be reset.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceReliabilityMBean Attribute=getInactivityTimeout)
            
          
          
            
              This is the maximum lifetime of a sequence. If this limit is reached before the
 sequence naturally completes, it will be forcibly terminated.
 String value in ‘Duration’ format. Defaults to ‘P1D’ (1 day). Set at sequence
 creation time, and cannot be reset.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceReliabilityMBean Attribute=getSequenceExpiration)
            
          
          
            
              A boolean flag indicating that RM destinations, by default, will receive
 non-buffered. Defaults to false. Note, changes to this default will
 only be picked up by new reliable sequences. Existing reliable sequences
 have their persistence handling set at creation time and these values will
 not change.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceReliabilityMBean Attribute=isNonBufferedDestination)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to TransactionLogJDBCStoreMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.TransactionLogJDBCStoreMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              When true, TLOGs are logged to a TLOG JDBC Store; otherwise,  
 TLOGs are logged to the server's default store.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum amount of time, in seconds, WebLogic Server tries to recover 
 from a JDBC TLog store failure. If store remains unusable after this period, 
 WebLogic Server set the health state to <code>HEALTH_FAILED</code>. 
 A value of 0 indicates WebLogic Server does not conduct a retry and
 and immediately sets the health state as <code>HEALTH_FAILED</code>. 
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum amount of time, in seconds, WebLogic Server waits before trying 
 to recover from a JDBC TLog store failure while processing a transaction. If store remains unusable 
 after this amount of time, WebLogic Server throws an exception the affected transaction. 
 A value of 0 indicates WebLogic Server does not conduct a retry and an exception will thrown immediately. 
 The practical maximum value is a value less than the current value of 
 <code>MaxRetrySecondsBeforeTLogFail</code>.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The amount of time, in seconds, WebLogic Server waits before attempting to verify 
 the health of the TLOG store after a store failure has occurred. 
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JDBCStoreMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JDBCStoreMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JDBCStoreMBean Attribute=getDataSourceAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JDBCStoreMBean Attribute=getTargetsAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JDBCStoreMBean Attribute=getConnectionPoolAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of table rows that are deleted per database
 call.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              A priority that the server uses to determine when it deploys an
 item. The priority is relative to other deployable items of the
 same type.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The name used by subsystems to refer to different stores on
 different servers using the same name.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of table rows that are inserted per database
 call.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Overrides the name of the XAResource that this store registers
 with JTA.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of table rows that are deleted per database
 call.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of JDBC store worker threads to process the
 workerload.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the batch size when the <code>Worker Count</code> attribute is
 configured to a value greater than 1.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the threshold, in bytes, when the
 JDBC store uses 3 steps (insert, select, populate)
 instead of 1 step (insert) to populate an Oracle Blob data type.
 
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to DataSourceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DataSourceMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The log settings for a DataSource.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DataSourceMBean Attribute=getDataSourceLogFile)
            
          
          
            
              The security protocol used by an RMI client to access a data source.
 Values are:
 <ul>
 <li>Secure: All incoming JDBC calls require administrator authentication. 
 All other subjects, including anonymous, are rejected. Requires a configured SSL listen port.</li>
 <li>Compatibility: Use an unsecure channel with the
 application's subject and no check for inbound
 administrator authentication when using RMI to access a data source. This setting reflects the legacy
 implementation behavior for RMI access to a data source and is a potential security vulnerability
 as it provides a client uncontrolled access to a database.</li>
 <li>The default value is Compatibility.</li>
 </ul>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DataSourceMBean Attribute=getRmiJDBCSecurity)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CoherenceServerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CoherenceServerMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CoherenceServerMBean Attribute=getCoherenceClusterSystemResourceAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The IP address for the cluster unicast listener.
            
          
          
            
              The port for the cluster unicast listener.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
               Specifies whether the unicast port will be automatically incremented if
 the port cannot be bound because it is already in
 use. 
            
          
          
            
              
 Returns the CoherenceServerStartMBean that can be used to start up this server
 remotely.
 
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ManagedExternalServerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ManagedExternalServerMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ManagedExternalServerMBean Attribute=getMachineAsString)
            
          
          
            
              
 Specifies whether the Node Manager can automatically restart this server if
 it crashes or otherwise goes down unexpectedly.
 
            
          
          
            
              
 The number of seconds during which this server can be restarted, up to the
 number of times specified in RestartMax.
 
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              
 The number of times that the Node Manager can restart this server within
 the interval specified in RestartIntervalSeconds.
 
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              
 The number of seconds the Node Manager should wait before restarting this
 server.
 
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Returns the timeout value to be used by NodeManagerRuntime when creating a
 socket connection to the agent. Default set high as SSH agent may require
 a high connection establishment time.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ManagedExternalServerMBean Attribute=getNMSocketCreateTimeoutInMillis)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ClusterMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The address that forms a portion of the URL a client uses to
 connect to this cluster, and that is used for generating EJB
 handles and entity EJB failover addresses. (This address may be
 either a DNS host name that maps to multiple IP addresses or a
 comma-separated list of single address host names or IP
 addresses.)
            
          
          
            
              The multicast address used by cluster members to communicate
 with each other.
            
          
          
            
              The multicast socket send/receive buffer size (at least 64
 kilobytes).
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The multicast port (between 1 and 65535) used by cluster members
 to communicate with each other.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of network hops (between 1 and 255) that a cluster
 multicast message is allowed to travel.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The amount of time (between 0 and 250 milliseconds) to delay
 sending message fragments over multicast in order to avoid OS-level
 buffer overflow.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Defines the algorithm to be used for load-balancing between replicated
 services if none is specified for a particular service. The
 <tt>round-robin</tt> algorithm cycles through a list of WebLogic
 Server instances in order. <tt>Weight-based</tt> load balancing
 improves on the round-robin algorithm by taking into account a
 pre-assigned weight for each server. In <tt>random</tt> load
 balancing, requests are routed to servers at random.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the messaging type used in the cluster.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the channel used to handle communications within a cluster. If no channel is specified
 the default channel is used.
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds (between 0 and 65534) by which the age of
 two conflicting services must differ before one is considered older
 than the other.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether to honor the WL-Proxy-Client-Cert header coming
 with the request or not. 
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the proprietary <tt>WL-Proxy-Client-IP</tt>
 header should be used. (This needed only when WebLogic plugins are
 configured.)
            
          
          
            
              Maximum number of seconds that a cluster member will wait to
 discover and synchronize with other servers in the cluster.
 Normally, the member will be able to sync in 30 seconds. If the
 value of this attribute is higher, that does not necessarily mean
 that it will take longer for the member to warmup. Instead it
 defines an upper bound on the time that a server will wait to sync
 with the servers that it has discovered. If the value is set 0,
 servers will not attempt to discover other running server in the cluster
 during server initialization
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
               Returns the value of HttpTraceSupportEnabled. 
            
          
          
            
              The name of the host to which all redirected URLs will be
 sent.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the HTTP port to which all redirected URLs will be
 sent.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the secure HTTP port to which all redirected URLs
 will be sent.
            
          
          
            
              Maximum number of periods that a cluster member will wait before
 timing out a member of a cluster.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Set the foreign cluster. Cluster infrastructure uses this
 address to connect to foreign cluster for HTTP Session WAN/MAN
 failover.
            
          
          
            
              Return the name of the table to be used for WAN session persistence.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getWANSessionPersistenceTableName)
            
          
          
            
              The channel name to be used for replication traffic. Cluster
 infrastructure uses this channel to send updates for HTTP
 sessions and stateful session beans. If none is set then the
 default channel will be used.
            
          
          
            
              If the cluster link between two clusters goes down, a trigger
 will run periodically to see if the link is restored. The
 duration is specified in milliseconds.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getDataSourceForSessionPersistenceAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getDataSourceForJobSchedulerAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The table name to use for storing timers active with the
 job scheduler
            
          
          
            
              When shutting down servers, sessions are not updated. If the
 primary and secondary servers of a session are shut down with no
 session updates, the session will be lost. Turning on
 PersistSessionsOnShutdown will save any active sessions to the
 database specified in {@link
 ClusterMBean#getDataSourceForSessionPersistence()} when a server
 is shutdown. The sessions will not be written at any other
 time. (For example, they are not saved via this mechanism if
 there is a server crash.)
            
          
          
            
              <p>Interval in seconds until the producer thread will wait for the
 AsyncSessionQueue to become unblocked.  Should be similar to the
 RequestTimeOut as that will determine the longest that the queue should
 remain full.<p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getAsyncSessionQueueTimeout)
            
          
          
            
              <p>Interval in seconds until HTTP Sessions are periodically flushed to
 secondary server.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getGreedySessionFlushInterval)
            
          
          
            
              Interval in seconds until HTTP Sessions are periodically
 flushed to the backup cluster to dump session state on disk.
            
          
          
            
              When number of sessions to be flushed reaches this threshold
 limit, sessions will be flushed to the backup cluster before the
 flush interval. This helps the server to flush sessions
 faster under load.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getCandidateMachinesForMigratableServersAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getDataSourceForAutomaticMigrationAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Interval in milliseconds at which Migratable Servers and
 Cluster Masters prove their liveness via the database.
            
          
          
            
              Maximum number of periods that a cluster member will wait before
 timing out a Cluster Master and also the maximum number of periods
 the Cluster Master will wait before timing out a Migratable Server.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              During automatic migration, if the Cluster Master determines a
 server to be dead, it waits for this period of time (in milliseconds)
 before the Cluster Master migrates the service to another server in the
 cluster.
            
          
          
            
              Singleton Services uses certain SQL commands to talk to the
 database. By default, the commands are obtained from a
 WebLogic-supplied implementation of
 weblogic.cluster.singleton.QueryHelper. If the database is not
 suported, or the SQL needs to be more optimized or altered for a
 particular use case, one can change the class used by setting
 this variable. The classname provided will be loaded at boot
 time, and used to execute the various SQL queries.
            
          
          
            
              Number of servers to be listed from this cluster when generating
 a cluster address automatically. This setting has no effect if
 Cluster Address is explicitly set.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getNumberOfServersInClusterAddress)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Optimizes cross-cluster replication for the type of network
 that servers in the clusters use for administrative communication.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Enables multicast data to be encrypted. Only the multicast data is encrypted.
 Multicast header information is not encrypted.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getMulticastDataEncryption)
            
          
          
            
              Return the name of the table to be used for server migration.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getAutoMigrationTableName)
            
          
          
            
              A migratable server could fail to come up on every possible
 configured machine. This attribute controls how many further
 attempts, after the first one, should be tried.

 Note that each attempt specified here indicates another full
 circuit of migrations amongst all the configured machines. So for
 a 3-server cluster, and the default value of 3, a total of 9
 migrations will be attempted.

 If it is set to -1, migrations will go on forever until the
 server starts.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getAdditionalAutoMigrationAttempts)
            
          
          
            
              Controls how long of a pause there should be between the
 migration attempts described in
 getAdditionalAutoMigrationAttempts(). Note that this delay only
 happens when the server has failed to come up on every machine.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getMillisToSleepBetweenAutoMigrationAttempts)
            
          
          
            
              Controls the mechanism used for server and service migration.
 <ul>
 <li><b>Database</b> -- Requires the availability of a high-availability database, such as Oracle RAC, 
 to store leasing information.
 <li><b>Consensus</b> -- Stores the leasing information in-memory within a cluster member. This option 
 requires Node Manager to be configured and running.
 </ul>   
 <p><b>Note:</b> Within a WebLogic Server installation, you can only use one type of leasing. 
 Although it is possible to implement multiple features that use leasing within your environment, 
 each must use the same kind of leasing.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getMigrationBasis)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Controls the number of cluster participants in determining consensus.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getConsensusParticipants)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Indicates if timeout should be applied to session replication calls.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=isReplicationTimeoutEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              Get attributes related to server overload protection. The default values
 for all cluster members are set here. Individual servers can override them
 as needed.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getOverloadProtection)
            
          
          
            
              Get attributes associated with database less leasing basis used for
 server migration and singleton services.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getDatabaseLessLeasingBasis)
            
          
          
            
              Get the number of HTTP pings to execute before declaring a server
 unreachable. This comes into effect only when MaxServerCountForHTTPPing
 is > 0.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getHTTPPingRetryCount)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Get the maximum number of servers that can be pinged via HTTP when
 the local server has lost multicast heartbeats from remote members. By
 default the server is taken out of the cluster when 3 consecutive
 heartbeats are lost. With this value > 0, the server attempts to ping the
 remote server point-to-point before declaring it unreachable. The ping is
 considered successful only when the cluster is in a stable state which
 means that the servers have already exchanged annoucements and the data
 on multicast is primarily liveliness heartbeat.
 <p>
 NOTE: This mechanism is useful only as a substitute for multicast heartbeats.
 If subsystems rely on sending data over multicast then they will continue to
 fail. If an application relies on WebLogic features that use multicast for
 sending and receiving data over multicast, this option is not useful. It is
 useful for HTTP session replication based applications where replication
 updates are sent point-to-point and multicast is only used to determine
 liveliness.
 </p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getMaxServerCountForHttpPing)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Servers in a cluster replicate session data. If a replication
 channel is defined then the session data will be sent using the replication
 channel protocol and secured replication settings will be ignored.
 If no replication channel is defined and secured replication is
 enabled then session data for in-memory replication will be sent over SSL
 using the default secured channel. However, this added security for replication
 traffic comes with a significant cluster performance degradation. It should
 only be enabled if security is of greater concern than performance
 degradation.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=isSecureReplicationEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              The timer period that determines how  often other members in the
 cluster are discovered in unicast messaging scheme. This is not applicable
 to multicast mode. It applies only to unicast mode.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Forces unicast messages to be processed in order.
 There are scenarios where JMS may update JNDI very frequently.
 It will result in a lot of messages over unicast. Due to the close
 proximity of messages the probability of out of order handling
 of messages increases which would trigger frequent state dumps.
 Frequent JNDI tree refresh may result in NameNotFoundException.
 Use this property to prevent out of order handling of messages.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates if one-way RMI is being used for replication. One-way RMI also
 requires configuring replication ports on each server in the cluster.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=isOneWayRmiForReplicationEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              Enables increased efficiency with session replication. Enabling this attribute 
 should be used only when configuring a WebLogic domain for Oracle Exalogic. 
 For more information, see "Enabling Exalogic-Specific Enhancements in Oracle WebLogic 
 Server 11g Release 1 (10.3.4)" in the Oracle Exalogic Deployment Guide.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=isSessionLazyDeserializationEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              Gets the DeathDetectory HeartbeatPeriod value. The ClusterMaster sends a
 heartbeat every period seconds to ascertian the health of a member.
 Members monitor this heartbeat in order to ascertain the health of the server
 hosting the DeathDetector.  In this case, the ClusterMaster.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=getDeathDetectorHeartbeatPeriod)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Enables faster Automatic Service Migration times with Database Leasing Basis.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ClusterMBean Attribute=isMemberDeathDetectorEnabled)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to TargetMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.TargetMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to DatabaseLessLeasingBasisMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DatabaseLessLeasingBasisMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Gets the MemberDiscoveryTimeout value. This value defines the amount of
 time a server waits during or after startup to discover members that
 belong to the same cluster. This information is used to join or form a
 new cluster.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DatabaseLessLeasingBasisMBean Attribute=getMemberDiscoveryTimeout)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Gets the LeaderHeartbeatPeriod value. The cluster leader heartbeats a
 special leader heartbeat every period seconds to publish group view
 version and other cluster information. Members look at this heartbeat
 and perform any sync up operations if required.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DatabaseLessLeasingBasisMBean Attribute=getLeaderHeartbeatPeriod)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Gets the message delivery timeout value. This is the amount of time a 
 server waits to get a response from the remote peer before taking recovery
 actions.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DatabaseLessLeasingBasisMBean Attribute=getMessageDeliveryTimeout)
            
          
          
            
              The timeout to wait and retry getting the server state when the NodeManager
 is unreachable. We try once more after waiting for the fence timeout
 period to make sure that the machine is really unavailable as opposed to
 heavy disk swapping.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DatabaseLessLeasingBasisMBean Attribute=getFenceTimeout)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the cluster leader needs to periodically check if
 it is still in the right network partition using NodeManager state query.
 By default the cluster leader or the seniormost member ensures that it
 is in the right partition by periodically checking with all NodeManagers.
 This is used to cover a case where the cluster leader was elected with most
 of the servers shutdown but subsequently there is a network partition
 with the leader in the minority partition. This is just done on the
 cluster leader instance and not on other instances.
            
          
          
            
              
 NodeManager timeout. Amount of time to wait for a response from
 NodeManager. NodeManager is used to get server state and decide if a server
 is really dead. Note that the server automatically calculates a timeout
 value and this mbean attribute is used as a upper bound.
 
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to FileT3MBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.FileT3MBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The path used to locate a WebLogic file (T3) service on a server
 host.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to EmbeddedLDAPMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.EmbeddedLDAPMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.EmbeddedLDAPMBean Attribute=getCredentialEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The hour at which the embedded LDAP server should be backed
 up.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The minute at which the embedded LDAP server should be backed
 up.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of backup copies that should be made for the
 embedded LDAP server.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether a cache is used with the embedded LDAP
 server.
            
          
          
            
              The size of the cache (in kilobytes) that is used with the
 embedded LDAP server.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The time-to-live of the cache (in seconds) that is used with the
 embedded LDAP server.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether a Managed Server should refresh all replicated
 data at boot time. (This is useful if you have made a large amount
 of changes when the Managed Server was not active, and you want to
 download the entire replica instead of having the Administration
 Server push each change to the Managed Server.)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether a Managed Server should always connect to the
 master LDAP server (contained in the Administration Server),
 instead of connecting to the local replicated LDAP server
 (contained in the Managed Server).
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the maximum number of seconds to wait for results from
 the embedded LDAP server before timing out. If this option is set
 to 0, there is no maximum time limit.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the embedded LDAP server should allow anonymous
 connections.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.EmbeddedLDAPMBean Attribute=isAnonymousBindAllowed)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to AppDeploymentMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.AppDeploymentMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The path to application's install-root directory, relative to the 
 domain/config/deployments directory.
            
          
          
            
              The location of this application's configuration area. This directory can 
 contain external descriptor files as specified within the deployment plan 
 document.
            
          
          
            
              The path to the deployment plan document on Administration Server.
            
          
          
            
              Uniquely identifies the application version across all versions 
 of the same application.
            
          
          
            
              This attribute is not used in the current release.
            
          
          
            
              The security model that is used to secure a deployed module. 
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The mode that specifies whether a deployment's files are
 copied from a source on the Administration Server to the Managed
 Server's staging area during application preparation. 
            
          
          
            
              A path on the file system for the application descriptor for
 this application. If null, the usual location within the ear is
 used (META-INF/application.xml);
            
          
          
            
              A path on the file system for the WLS-specific application
 descriptor for this application. If null, the usual location within
 the EAR file is used
            
          
          
            
              The Application Identifier of the application version uniquely identifies 
 the application version across all versions of all applications. 
 If the application is not versioned, 
 the Application Identifier is the same as the application name.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the application.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to LibraryMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LibraryMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to DomainLibraryMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainLibraryMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WSReliableDeliveryPolicyMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WSReliableDeliveryPolicyMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WSReliableDeliveryPolicyMBean Attribute=getJMSServerAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The default maximum number of times that the sender runtime
 should attempt to redeliver a message that the receiver WebLogic
 Server has not yet acknowledged.
            
          
          
            
              The default minimum number of seconds that the sender runtime
 should wait between retries if the receiver does not send an
 acknowledgement of receiving the message, or if the sender runtime
 detects a communications error while attempting to send a
 message.
            
          
          
            
              The default number of seconds that the receiver of the reliable
 message should persist the history of the reliable message in its
 store.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JDBCDataSourceFactoryMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JDBCDataSourceFactoryMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The database account user name used in physical database
 connections. This may be overridden by <code>user-name</code> in
 the descriptor.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JDBCDataSourceFactoryMBean Attribute=getPasswordEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The URL of the database to connect to. The format of the URL
 varies by JDBC driver.
            
          
          
            
              The full package name of JDBC driver class used to create the
 physical database connections in the connection pool.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JDBCDataSourceFactoryMBean Attribute=getPropertiesAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The name used in deployment descriptor files to reference this
 JDBC data source factory.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to XMLEntityCacheMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLEntityCacheMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Provides the path name for the persistent cache files.
            
          
          
            
              The memory size, in KB, of the cache. The default value is 500
 KB.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The disk size, in MB, of the persistent disk cache. The default
 value is 5 MB.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The default timeout interval, in seconds, for the cache. The
 default value is 120 seconds.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Provides the maximum number of entries that can be stored in the
 cache at any given time.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CachingRealmMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CachingRealmMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CachingRealmMBean Attribute=getBasicRealmAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the specified security realm is
 case-sensitive. To use a realm that is not case-sensitive (such as
 the Windows NT and LDAP security realms), disable this
 attribute.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the ACL cache should be enabled. By default,
 the ACL cache is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Authentication cache should be enabled. By
 default, the Authentication cache is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Group cache should be enabled. By default,
 the Group cache is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the Permission cache should be enabled. By
 default, the Permission cache is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the User cache should be enabled. By default,
 the User cache is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of ACL lookups to cache. This value should be
 a prime number for best lookup performance.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of Authentication requests to cache. This
 value should be a prime number for best lookup performance.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of group lookups to cache. This value should
 be a prime number for best performance.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of permission lookups to cache. This value
 should be a prime number for best performance.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of user lookups to cache. This value should
 be a prime number for best performance.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds to retain the results of a successful ACL
 lookup.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds to retain the results of a successful
 group lookup.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds to retain the results of a successful
 Authentication lookup.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds to retain the results of a successful
 permission lookup.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds to retain the results of a successful user
 lookup.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds to retain the results of an unsuccessful
 ACL lookup.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds to retain the results of an unsuccessful
 group lookup.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds to retain the results of an unsuccessful
 Authentication lookup.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds to retain the results of an unsuccessful
 permission lookup.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds to retain the results of an unsuccessful
 user lookup.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds to store the members of a group before
 updating it.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to RealmMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.RealmMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.RealmMBean Attribute=getCachingRealmAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.RealmMBean Attribute=getFileRealmAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The number of users, groups, and ACLs to return per Remote
 Procedure Call (RPC).
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies ability to enumerate users, groups, and memberships to
 prevent possible Denial Of Service attacks (if there are many users
 or groups).
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to PasswordPolicyMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.PasswordPolicyMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The minimum number of characters required for any password in
 this WebLogic Server domain.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this WebLogic Server domain tracks invalid
 login attempts and takes appropriate action. (The remaining fields
 on this page are relevant only if you check this box.)
            
          
          
            
              The number of failed logins (between 1 and 99999) that can be
 tried for a user before their account is locked.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of minutes (between 0 and 999999) that a user's
 account remains inaccessible after being locked.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of minutes (between 0 and 999999) within which
 invalid login attempts must happen in order for the user's account
 to be locked.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The size of the cache (between 1 and 99999 kilobytes) used for
 invalid login attempts.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              If the number of current invalid login attempts is equal to or
 great than this attribute, WebLogic Server deletes any expired
 records from the cache. The lower the value of this attribute, the
 more often WebLogic Server clears the cache. This may impact the
 performance of WebLogic Server. Set the attribute accordingly.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CustomRealmMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CustomRealmMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CustomRealmMBean Attribute=getConfigurationDataAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CustomRealmMBean Attribute=getPasswordEncryptedAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to LDAPRealmMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LDAPRealmMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The location of the LDAP server.
            
          
          
            
              The distinguished name (DN) of the LDAP user that WebLogic
 Server uses to connect to the LDAP server. This user must be able
 to list LDAP users and groups.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.LDAPRealmMBean Attribute=getCredentialEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the SSL protocol is used to protect
 communications between the LDAP server and WebLogic Server.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the class that implements an LDAP directory server.
 This attribute allows you to use an LDAP directory server other
 than the one supplied by Sun Microsystems. WebLogic Server supports
 the following LDAP directory servers: Open LDAP, Netscape iPlanet,
 Microsoft Site Server, and Novell NDs.
            
          
          
            
              The type of authentication used to authenticate the LDAP
 server.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The method for allowing or denying a user the right to
 communicate with WebLogic Server.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              If the User Authentication field is set to <tt>local</tt>, this
 attribute finds the attribute in the LDAP user objects that
 contains the passwords of the LDAP users.
            
          
          
            
              The list of attributes that, when combined with the attribute
 named in the User Name Attribute field, uniquely identifies a user
 in the LDAP directory.
            
          
          
            
              The login name of a user for the LDAP directory. The value can
 be the common name of a user in the LDAP directory. However, it is
 generally an abbreviated string, such as a User ID.
            
          
          
            
              The list of attributes that, when combined with the value of the
 Group Name Attribute field, uniquely identifies a group in the LDAP
 directory.
            
          
          
            
              The name of a group in the LDAP directory. The value is usually
 the common name.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies how group membership is recorded in the LDAP
 directory.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the attribute that contains a group member in a
 group entry.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to NTRealmMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.NTRealmMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The host name of the Windows NT Primary Domain Controller where
 users and groups are defined for the domain.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies how many bytes worth of user/group data to get per NT
 call.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              During initialization of the NT Realm, some Domains may not be
 present on the network. The default configuration for this
 situation is to throw a SecurityException and halt server startup.
 This property will allow NTRealm to ignore uncontactable Primary
 Domain Controllers during startup with the hope that they will be
 reachable later on.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to UnixRealmMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.UnixRealmMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The name of the program used to authenticate users in the UNIX
 security realm. In most cases, the name of the program is <tt>wlauth</tt>.
 The authentication program must run <tt>setuid root</tt>.
 <ul>
 <li>
 If the program name is <tt>wlauth</tt> and is in the <tt>CLASSPATH</tt>,
 you need not explicitly set this attribute; leave the attribute blank.
 <li>
 If the program name is different than <tt>wlauth</tt>, or if it is not in the
 <tt>CLASSPATH</tt> of WebLogic Server, specify this attribute.
 </ul>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.UnixRealmMBean Attribute=getAuthProgram)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSServerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSServerMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The session pools defined for the JMS server.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSServerMBean Attribute=getPersistentStoreAsString)
            
          
          
            
              
 Specifies whether message persistence is supported for this JMS server.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether JMS clients will get an exception when
 sending persistent messages to a destination targeted to a JMS server
 that does not have a persistent store configured.
 This parameter only has effect when the Store Enabled parameter
 is disabled (false).
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether this JMS server can be used to host temporary destinations.
            
          
          
            
              The name of a JMS module that contains a template that this JMS
 server can use to create temporary destinations.
            
          
          
            
              The name of a configured JMS template that this JMS server uses to create
 temporary destinations.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of bytes that can be stored in this JMS server. A value of
 <code>-1</code> removes any WebLogic Server limits.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The upper threshold (number of bytes stored in this JMS server)
 that triggers flow control and logging events. A value of
 <code>-1</code> disables the events for this JMS server.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The lower threshold (number of bytes stored in this JMS server)
 that triggers flow control and logging events. A value of
 <code>-1</code> disables the events for this JMS server.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of messages that can be stored in this JMS server. A value of
 <code>-1</code> removes any WebLogic Server limits.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The upper threshold (number of messages stored in this JMS
 server) that triggers flow control and logging events. A value of
 <code>-1</code> disables the events for this JMS server.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The lower threshold (number of messages stored in this JMS
 server) that triggers flow control and logging events. A value of
 <code>-1</code> disables the events for this JMS server.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether the JDBCStoreUpgradeEnabled is set.
            
          
          
            
              This parameter has been deprecated. Paging is always enabled. The
 "MessageBufferSize" parameter controls how much memory is used before
 paging kicks in.
            
          
          
            
              This parameter has been deprecated. Paging is always enabled. The
 "MessageBufferSize" parameter controls how much memory is used before
 paging kicks in.
            
          
          
            
              The amount of memory (in bytes) that this JMS server can use
 to store message bodies before it writes them to disk.
 When the JMS server writes the message bodies to disk, it clears
 them from memory.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              
 Specifies where message bodies are written when the size 
 of the message bodies in the JMS server exceeds the message
 buffer size.
            
          
          
            
              Determines whether OS file locking is used. 
            
          
          
            
              The minimum amount of data, in bytes and rounded down to the nearest power of 2, 
 mapped into the JVM's address space per paging store file.  Applies
 only when a native <code>wlfileio</code> library is loaded.
 See
 <a href='#getPagingMaxWindowBufferSize'>Paging Maximum Window Buffer Size</a>.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum amount of data, in bytes and rounded down to the nearest power of 2,
 mapped into the JVM's address space per paging store file.
 Applies only when a native <code>wlfileio</code> library is loaded.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              <p>The I/O buffer size, in bytes, automatically rounded down to the nearest power of 2.
 <ul>
 <li>When a native <code>wlfileio</code> driver is available, the setting applies to off-heap (native) memory.</li>
 <li>When a native <code>wlfileio</code> driver is not available, 
 the setting applies to JAVA heap memory.</li>
 <li>For the best runtime performance, Oracle recommends setting 
 <code>PagingIOBufferSize</code> so that it is larger than the largest 
 write (multiple concurrent store requests may be combined into a single write).</li>
 <li>See the JMS server runtime MBean attribute <code>PagingAllocatedIOBufferBytes</code> to find out the actual allocated 
 off-heap (native) memory amount.</li>
 </ul>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSServerMBean Attribute=getPagingIoBufferSize)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The paging maximum file size, in bytes.  
 <ul> 
 <li>The <code>PagingMaxFileSize</code> value affects the number of files needed to accommodate 
 a paging store of a particular size (number of files = paging store size/MaxFileSize rounded up).</li>

 <li>A paging store automatically reuses space freed by deleted records and automatically 
  expands individual files up to <code>PagingMaxFileSize</code> if there is not enough space for a new 
 record. If there is no space left in exiting files for a new record, a paging store creates an additional file.</li>

 <li> A small number of larger files is normally preferred over a large number of smaller files 
 as each file allocates Window Buffer and file handles. </li>

 <code>PagingBlockSize</code>, then <code>MaxFileSize</code> is 
 <code>PagingBlockSize</code>. The default <code>PagingBlockSize</code> is 512, 
 512 is 8 GB. </li>
 </ul>
 Oracle recommends not setting the Paging Max File Size above the default value of 1,342,177,280.  
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The smallest addressable block, in bytes, of a file.
 When a native <code>wlfileio</code> driver is available
 and the paging block size has not been configured by the user,
 the store selects the minimum OS specific value for unbuffered
  (direct) I/O, if it is within the range [512, 8192].
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds 
 between this JMS server's cycles of scanning local destinations for
 expired messages. A value of <code>0</code> disables active scanning. A
 very large scan interval effectively disables active scanning.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of bytes allowed in individual messages on this JMS server.
 The size of a message includes the message body, any user-defined
 properties, and the user-defined JMS header fields
 <code>JMSCorrelationID</code> and <code>JMSType</code>.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Determines whether the JMS server delivers smaller messages
 before larger ones when a destination has exceeded its maximum
 number of messages. <code>FIFO</code> prevents the JMS server from
 delivering smaller messages when larger ones are already waiting
 for space. <code>Preemptive</code> allows smaller send requests to
 preempt previous larger ones when there is sufficient space for
 smaller messages on the destination.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether production is paused at server startup on destinations  
 targeted to this JMS server. A destination cannot receive any new 
 messages while it is paused.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether insertion is paused at startup on destinations 
 targeted to this JMS server. A destination cannot receive any new 
 messages while it is paused.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether consumption is paused at startup on destinations
 targeted to this JMS server at startup. A destination cannot receive any new 
 messages while it is paused.
            
          
          
            
              The message log file configuration for this JMS Server.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSServerMBean Attribute=getJMSMessageLogFile)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSSessionPoolMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSSessionPoolMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The connection consumers for this JMS session pool. JMS
 connection consumers are queues (Point-To-Point) or topics
 (Pub/Sub) that retrieve server sessions and process messages. Once
 you have defined a session pool, you can configure one or more
 connection consumers for each session pool.
            
          
          
            
              The JNDI name of the connection factory for this JMS session
 pool. Connection factories are used to create connections with
 predefined attributes.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the server-side listener class for this JMS session
 pool, which is used to receive and process messages
 concurrently.
            
          
          
            
              The acknowledge mode used by non-transacted sessions within this
 JMS session pool.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of sessions allowed for this JMS session
 pool. A value of <code>-1</code> indicates that there is no
 maximum.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether this JMS session pool creates transacted
 sessions.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSConnectionConsumerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSConnectionConsumerMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The defined maximum number of messages that the connection
 consumer can load at one time into a ServerSession's session.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The defined JMS message selector of the connection consumer.
            
          
          
            
              The JNDI name of the destination for this connection
 consumer.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to VirtualHostMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.VirtualHostMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The list of host names, separated by line breaks, for which this 
 virtual host will serve requests.
            
          
          
            
              The dedicated server channel name (NetworkAccessPoint) for which this
 virtual host will serve http request. If the NetworkAccessPoint for a
 given http request doesn't match any virtual host's NetworkAccessPoint,
 incoming HOST header will be matched with the VirtualHostNames in order
 to resolve the right virtual host. 
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to EJBContainerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.EJBContainerMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The path to the Java compiler to use to compile EJBs (e.g. "sj"
 or "javac"). Note: the default must be null. If no JavaCompiler is
 specified on this specific EJBComponent, the default will be pulled
 in the following order from - EJBContainerMBean -
 Server.JavaCompiler.
            
          
          
            
              Provides a list of the options to prepend to the Java compiler
 classpath when you compile Java code.
            
          
          
            
              Provides a list of the options to append to the Java compiler
 classpath when you compile Java code.
            
          
          
            
              The extra options passed to rmic during server-side generation
 are noted here. The default for this attribute must be null. If no
 ExtraRmicOptions are specified on the EJBComponent, the default
 will be pulled from Server.ExtraRmicOptions.
            
          
          
            
              indicates whether KeepGenerated is enabled and the ejbc source
 files will be kept.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether the ForceGeneration is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Return the temporary directory where generated files are stored
 by ejbc. Deprecated: All EJB compiler output is now stored in the
 EJBCompilerCache subdirectory of the server staging directory. This
 directory should not be described as "temporary" since removing it
 would cause the EJB compiler to be rerun as necessary the next time
 the server is restarted.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether the VerboseEJBDeployment is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the extra options passed to ejbc during the dynamic ejbc
 of a jar file. For example: -J-mx128m By default this value is
 null. If no ExtraEJBCOptions are specified on the EJBComponent, the
 default will be pulled from the Server.ExtraEJBCOptions.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebAppContainerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebAppContainerMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Beginning with the 9.0 release the FORM/BASIC authentication behavior
 has been modified to conform strictly to the J2EE Specification. If a user 
 has logged-in but does not have privileges to access a resource, the 
 403 (FORBIDDEN) page will be returned. Turn this flag on to enable the old 
 behavior, which was to return the user to the login form.
            
          
          
            
               In the security-constraints elements defined in a Web application's 
 web.xml deployment descriptor, the auth-constraint element indicates 
 the user roles that should be permitted access to this resource collection. 
" is a compact syntax for indicating all roles in the
" was treated as
 all users/roles defined in the realm.

 This parameter is a backward-compatibility switch to restore old behavior.
 Default behavior is one required by the spec, meaning all roles
 defined in the web application.

 If set, the value defined in weblogic.xml (container-descriptor -> allow-all-roles)
 takes precedence (if set) over this value. 
            
          
          
            
               Indicates whether or not to apply filters to dispatched requests. This
 is a backward compatibility flag. Until version 8.1, WebLogic Server
 applied ServletFilters (if configured for the Web application) on
 request dispatches (and includes/forwards). Servlet 2.4 has introduced the
 "Dispatcher" element to make this behavior explicit. The default value is
 Dispatcher=REQUEST. In order to be complaint with the J2EE specification,
 the default value for FilterDispatchedRequestsEnabled is false beginning with WebLogic
 Server 9.0. Note that if you are using old descriptors (meaning web.xml does
 not have version=2.4), then WebLogic Server automatically uses
 FilterDispatchedRequestsEnabled = true for the Web applications, unless
 filter-dispatched-requests-enabled is explicitly set to false in
 weblogic.xml. This means that old applications will work fine without any
 modification. Additionally, during migration of old domains to the 9.0 domain,
 the migration plugin automatically sets this flag to true. 
            
          
          
            
              This parameter is used to enable overload protection in the webapp container
 against low memory conditions. When a low memory situation occurs, new session
 creation attempts will result in weblogic.servlet.SessionCreationException. The
 application code needs to catch this exception and take proper action.
 Alternatively appropriate error-pages can be configured in web.xml against
 weblogic.servlet.SessionCreationException. This check is performed only
 on memory and replicated sessions. 
            
          
          
            
               WebLogic Server uses the X-Powered-By HTTP header, as recommended
 by the Servlet 2.4 specification, to publish its implementation
 information.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Returns the name of the file containing mime-mappings for the
  domain.
            
          
          
            
               When OptimisticSerialization is turned on, WebLogic server does not
 serialize-deserialize context and request attributes upon
 getAttribute(name) when a request gets dispatched across servlet contexts.
 This means you will need to make sure that the attributes common to
 Web applications are scoped to a common parent classloader (they are application-scoped)
 or placed in the system classpath if the two Web applications do not belong to the
 same application. When OptimisticSerialization is turned off (which is the default)
 WebLogic Server does serialize-deserialize context and request attributes upon
 getAttribute(name) to avoid the possibility of ClassCastExceptions.
 The value of OptimisticSerialization can also be overridden for specific Web applications
 by setting the optimistic-serialization value in weblogic.xml.
 
            
          
          
            
               retain-original-url is used in FORM based authentication scenarios. When this property
 is set to true, after a successful authentication, Weblogic Server will redirect back
 to the web resource (page/servlet) retaining the protocol (http/https) used to
 access the protected resource in the original request. If set to false (which is the
 default value), Weblogic Server will redirect back to the protected resource using
 the current protocol.
 retain-original-url value can also be specified at per webapp level
 in weblogic.xml. The value in weblogic.xml, if specified, overrides the domain
 level value.
            
          
          
            
               ServletAuthenticationFormURL is used for backward compatibility with previous
 releases of Weblogic Server.If ServletAuthenticationFormURL is set to true (default), then
 ServletAuthentication.getTargetURLForFormAuthentication() and
 HttpSession.getAttribute(AuthFilter.TARGET_URL) will return the URL of the protected
 target resource. If set to false, the above API's will return the URI of the protected
 target resource. By default the value is set to true.(new method added in 9.0.0.1) 
            
          
          
            
              Global property which determines the behavior of the JSP compiler when a
 jsp:param attribute "name" has a request time value. Without this property
 set to "true", the JSP compiler throws an error for a JSP using a
 request time value for the "name" attribute as mandated by the JSP 2.0 spec.
 This property exists for backward compatibility.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether or not to honor the WL-Proxy-Client-Cert header coming
 with the request. 
            
          
          
            
               Returns the value of HttpTraceSupportEnabled. 
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether or not the proprietary <tt>WL-Proxy-Client-IP</tt>
 header should be honored. (This is needed only when WebLogic
 plugins are configured.)
            
          
          
            
              Whether authcookie feature is enabled or not.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether the session ID should include JVM information.
 (Checking this box may be necessary when using URL rewriting with
 WAP devices that limit the size of the URL to 128 characters, and
 may also affect the use of replicated sessions in a cluster.)
 When this box is selected, the default size of the URL
 will be set at 52 characters, and it will not contain any special characters.
            
          
          
            
              The amount of time this server waits between receiving chunks of data
 in an HTTP POST data before it times out. (This is used to prevent 
 denial-of-service attacks that attempt to overload the server with POST data.)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Max Post Time (in seconds) for reading HTTP POST data in a
 servlet request. MaxPostTime &lt; 0 means unlimited
            
          
          
            
              The maximum post size this server allows for reading HTTP POST
 data in a servlet request. A value less than 0 indicates an
 unlimited size.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether or not WorkContextPropagation is enabled.
 By default it is turned on. There is a little overhead involved in
 propagating WorkContexts. Therefore, if you don't care about WorkContext
 propagation, turn this value off in production environments. 
            
          
          
            
               Returns the P3P Header value that will be sent with all
 responses for http requests (if non-null). The value of this header
 points to the location of the policy reference file for the Web site.
            
          
          
            
              Global property to determine the behavior of the JSP compiler.
 When this property set to "true", the JSP compiler throws a translation
 error for JSPs that do not conform to the JSP2.0 specification.
 This property exists for backward compatibility.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebAppContainerMBean Attribute=getServletReloadCheckSecs)
            
          
          
            
              Global property to determine the behavior of getRealPath() for 
 archived web applications. When this property set to "true", 
 getRealPath() will return the canonical path of the resource files. 
            
          
          
            
              Global property to determine if we need to generate a new SessionID 
 after authentication. When this property set to "false", the previous 
 sessionID will be retained even after authorization. 
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SelfTuningMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SelfTuningMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Get all the fair share request classes
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SelfTuningMBean Attribute=getFairShareRequestClasses)
            
          
          
            
              Get all the response time request classes
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SelfTuningMBean Attribute=getResponseTimeRequestClasses)
            
          
          
            
              Get all the context request classes
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SelfTuningMBean Attribute=getContextRequestClasses)
            
          
          
            
              Get all the min threads constraint
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SelfTuningMBean Attribute=getMinThreadsConstraints)
            
          
          
            
              Get all the max threads constraint
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SelfTuningMBean Attribute=getMaxThreadsConstraints)
            
          
          
            
              Get all the capacity definitions
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SelfTuningMBean Attribute=getCapacities)
            
          
          
            
              Get all the defined work managers.
 <p>
 A note about dynamic additions and deletions of WorkManager in a running
 server. Only applications or modules deployed or re-deployed after the
 changes are made can pick up the newly added WorkManagers. Existing
 production applications resolve their dispatch-policies to work managers
 during deployment time and once the application is exported and in
 production mode, the server does not swap work manager's midway. The
 tight binding helps performance and also avoids issues like what happens
 to inflight work in the old work manager. This attribute is marked as
 dynamic so that new applications (re)deployed can pick up the WorkManager
 changes.
 Please note that this applies only to resolving dispatch-policies to
 WorkManagers. Existing attributes within a work manager like fair-share
 and constraints can be modified without requiring a redeploy.
 </p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SelfTuningMBean Attribute=getWorkManagers)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ResponseTimeRequestClassMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ResponseTimeRequestClassMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
               A response time goal in milliseconds. 
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ContextRequestClassMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ContextRequestClassMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ContextRequestClassMBean Attribute=getContextCases)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CapacityMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CapacityMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Total number of requests that can be enqueued.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CapacityMBean Attribute=getCount)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to PathServiceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.PathServiceMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.PathServiceMBean Attribute=getPersistentStoreAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSBridgeDestinationMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSBridgeDestinationMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The connection factory's JNDI name for this JMS bridge
 destination.
            
          
          
            
              The initial context factory name for this JMS bridge
 destination.
            
          
          
            
              The connection URL for this JMS bridge destination.
            
          
          
            
              The destination JNDI name for this JMS bridge destination.
            
          
          
            
              The destination type (queue or topic) for this JMS bridge
 destination.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ShutdownClassMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ShutdownClassMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SingletonServiceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingletonServiceMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The fully qualified name of a class to load and run. The class
 must be on the server's classpath.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingletonServiceMBean Attribute=getConstrainedCandidateServersAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingletonServiceMBean Attribute=getClusterAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JoltConnectionPoolMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JoltConnectionPoolMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The list of addresses for the primary Jolt Server Listeners
 (JSLs) on the Tuxedo system.
            
          
          
            
              The list of Jolt Server Listeners (JSLs) addresses that is used
 if the connection pool cannot estabilish connections to the Primary
 Addresses, or if the primary connections fail.
            
          
          
            
              The minimum number of connections to be added to this Jolt
 connection pool when WebLogic Server starts.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of connections that can be made from this
 Jolt connection pool.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              A user name that applications specify to connect to this Jolt
 connection pool. If Security Context is enabled, this name must be
 the name of an authorized Tuxedo user. (Specifying a Tuxedo user
 name is required if the Tuxedo authentication level is
 <code>USER_AUTH</code>.)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JoltConnectionPoolMBean Attribute=getUserPasswordEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JoltConnectionPoolMBean Attribute=getApplicationPasswordEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The Tuxedo user role for this Jolt connection pool. (This is
 required only when the security level in the Tuxedo domain is
 <tt>USER_AUTH</tt>, <tt>ACL</tt>, or <tt>MANDATORY_ACL</tt>).
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether this Jolt connection pool passes the
 connection pool's security context (user name, password and other
 information) from the WebLogic Server user to the Tuxedo
 domain.
            
          
          
            
              The number of seconds the client waits to receive a response
 before timing out.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The path and file name of the keystore containing the private key
 used in SSL mutual authentication.
            
          
          
            
              The path and file name of the keystore containing the trust certificates.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JoltConnectionPoolMBean Attribute=getKeyPassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JoltConnectionPoolMBean Attribute=getKeyStorePassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JoltConnectionPoolMBean Attribute=getTrustStorePassPhraseEncryptedAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to FileStoreMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.FileStoreMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.FileStoreMBean Attribute=getTargetsAsString)
            
          
          
            
              A priority that the server uses to determine when it deploys an
 item. The priority is relative to other deployable items of the
 same type.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The name used by subsystems to refer to different stores on
 different servers using the same name.
            
          
          
            
              Overrides the name of the XAResource that this store registers
 with JTA.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSInteropModuleMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSInteropModuleMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CustomResourceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CustomResourceMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              This is the name of the class that is used to manage the lifecycle of
 the resource.  An instance of the ResourceClass is created and is passed
 the DescriptorBean.  If this value is not set then the resource does not
 participate in the deployment lifecycle and simply represent a distribution
 of configuration information to be used by other subsystems.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CustomResourceMBean Attribute=getResourceClass)
            
          
          
            
              Returns the interface of the bean that is returned by the #getResource method.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CustomResourceMBean Attribute=getDescriptorBeanClass)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WLDFSystemResourceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WLDFSystemResourceMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Optional short description of this WLDFSystemResource. If
 provided, the WebLogic Server Administration Console will display
 the resource description.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JDBCSystemResourceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JDBCSystemResourceMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SAFAgentMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SAFAgentMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SAFAgentMBean Attribute=getStoreAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The maximum bytes quota (total amount of bytes) that can be
 stored in this SAF agent.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The upper threshold value that triggers events based on the
 number of bytes stored in the SAF agent.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The lower threshold that triggers events based on the number of
 bytes stored in the SAF agent.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum message quota (total amount of messages) that can be
 stored in this SAF agent.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The upper threshold that triggers events based on the number of
 messages stored in the SAF agent.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The low threshold that triggers events based on the number of
 messages stored in the SAF agent.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of bytes allowed in individual messages on
 this SAF agent.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The amount of time, in milliseconds, between the original
 delivery attempt and the first retry.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum amount of time, in milliseconds, between two
 successive delivery retry attempts.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The factor used to multiply the previous delay time to calculate
 the next delay time to be used.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The type of service that this SAF agent provides. JMS requires only a Sending agent 
 on the sending side for messages. Whereas, Web Services Reliable Messaging requires both a 
 Sending and Receiving agent for messages.
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              For JMS messages, the number of messages in a batch. A sending agent
 waits to forward a message batch until the source destination 
 message count is greater than or equal to this value. For a distributed queue or topic, 
 <code>WindowSize</code> setting is ignored and always internally set to 1 message.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether a message is logged in the server log file
 when a message fails to be forwarded.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum amount of time allowed before a sending side
 releases the resources used by a conversation.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum interval between two successive acknowledgements
 sent by the receiving side.
            
          
          
            
              The default amount of time, in milliseconds, that the agent
 guarantees to reliably send messages.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the agent is paused for incoming messages at
 startup time.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the agent is paused for forwarding messages at
 the startup time.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies whether the agent is paused for receiving messages at
 the startup time.
            
          
          
            
              The amount of memory used to store message bodies in memory
 before they are paged out to disk.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              
 Specifies where message bodies are written when the size
 of the message bodies in the JMS server exceeds the message
 buffer size. If unspecified, messages are written to the
 <code>tmp</code> directory in the host WebLogic Server
 instance's directory. For example,
 <code><em>domainName</em>/servers/<em>servername</em>/tmp</code>.
 
            
          
          
            
              The maximum amount of time, in milliseconds, that a JMS sending agent 
 waits before forwarding messages in a single batch. For a distributed queue or topic, 
 <code>WindowInterval</code> setting is ignored.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The jms message log file configuration for this saf agent
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SAFAgentMBean Attribute=getJMSSAFMessageLogFile)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ErrorHandlingMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ErrorHandlingMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Policy
            
          
          
            
              Policy
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to RemoteSAFContextMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.RemoteSAFContextMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              URL
            
          
          
            
              Protocol
            
          
          
            
              UserName
            
          
          
            
              Password
            
          
          
            
              JndiProperty
            
          
          
            
              JndiInitialContextFactory
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to MigratableRMIServiceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.MigratableRMIServiceMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The rmi class name (including the package name)
            
          
          
            
              You must provide an argument string to initialize or destroy the
 RMI class. This argument must be a string.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebserviceSecurityMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebserviceSecurityMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              <p>Specifies the list of token handlers that have been configured for this
 Web Service security configuration.<p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebserviceSecurityMBean Attribute=getWebserviceTokenHandlers)
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies the list of credential providers that have been configured 
 for this Web Service security configuration.<p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebserviceSecurityMBean Attribute=getWebserviceCredentialProviders)
            
          
          
            
              <p>Specifies the list of tokens that have been configured 
 for this Web Service security configuration.<p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebserviceSecurityMBean Attribute=getWebserviceSecurityTokens)
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the timestamp information that has been configured for this
 Web Service security configuration.
            
          
          
            
              Gets the default STS endpoint URL for all WS-Trust enabled credential
  providers of this Web Service security configuration.
            
          
          
            
              Gets the value of the PolicySelectionPreference attribute. </p>
 <p>
 The preference value can be one of the following:
 <ul>
 <li>NONE
 <li>SCP
 <li>SPC
 <li>CSP
 <li>CPS
 <li>PCS
 <li>PSC
 </ul>
 <p>
 Where: S: Security or functionality; C: Compatibility or Interoperability; P: Performance
 <p>
 If NONE is specified, no preference is applied - the
 first policy alternative is always chosen, and optional
 policy assertions are ignored.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebserviceSecurityMBean Attribute=getPolicySelectionPreference)
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Gets the value of the compatiblityPreference attribute.
            
          
          
            
              Gets the value of the compatiblityOrderingPreference attribute.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebserviceTokenHandlerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebserviceTokenHandlerMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Specifies the order in which the token handlers execute on a given 
 token. 
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebserviceTimestampMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebserviceTimestampMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Specifies whether the Web Service assumes synchronized clocks.
            
          
          
            
              DEPRECATED -- Use set/getClockSkew() -- If both ClockSkew and ClockPrecision
 are defined, then ClockSkew takes precedence and is used.
 <p>If clocks are synchronized, this attribute describes the accuracy of 
 the synchronization.</p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebserviceTimestampMBean Attribute=getClockPrecision)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
               ClockSkew takes precedence over ClockPrecision if both are defined,
 as ClockPrecision has been DEPRECATED.
 <p>If clocks are synchronized, this attribute describes the accuracy of
 the synchronization between two clocks: the client and the server.
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              DEPRECATED. 

            
          
          
            
              Specifies the freshness policy for received messages:
 the Web Service observes the processing delay by subtracting the Created
 time in the Timestamp from the current time.
            
          
          
            
              Represents the length of time the sender wants the outbound message to 
 be valid. 
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to AdminConsoleMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.AdminConsoleMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Returns the Cookie Name used by the Administration
 Console. 
            
          
          
            
              Returns Session Timeout value (in seconds) for
 Administration Console. 
            
          
          
            
              Returns the log out URL for the Administration Console in a 
 single sign-on (SSO) environment. Only needed when you use the 
 Console with an SSO provider that requires a log out URL so that 
 it can clean up its SSO session state. See the SSO provider 
 documentation for details on the URL value
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to RestfulManagementServicesMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.RestfulManagementServicesMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Enables the monitoring of this WebLogic Server domain through
 the RESTful Management Services Web application.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSDistributedTopicMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSDistributedTopicMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebDeploymentMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebDeploymentMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebDeploymentMBean Attribute=getVirtualHostsAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ForeignJNDIObjectMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ForeignJNDIObjectMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The name that the remote object will be bound to in the local
 server's JNDI tree. This is the name that should be used to look up
 the object on the local server.
            
          
          
            
              The name of the remote object that will be looked up in the
 remote JNDI directory.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JDBCPoolComponentMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JDBCPoolComponentMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ApplicationMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ApplicationMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ConversationServiceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ConversationServiceMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebServiceComponentMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WebServiceComponentMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WebLogicMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.WebLogicMBean)
    
    
      
        
          The name of this configuration. WebLogic Server uses an MBean to
 implement and persist the configuration.
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ForeignJMSDestinationMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ForeignJMSDestinationMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSTemplateMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSTemplateMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CacheAsyncListenersMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheAsyncListenersMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Specify if listeners must be fired asynchronously
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheAsyncListenersMBean Attribute=getEnabled)
            
          
          
            
              The work manager to be used for firing event listeners asynchronously
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheAsyncListenersMBean Attribute=getWorkManager)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to XMLRegistryEntryMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.XMLRegistryEntryMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Provides the public id of the document type represented by this
 registry entry.
            
          
          
            
              Provides the system id of the document type represented by this
 registry entry.
            
          
          
            
              Provides the tag name of the document root element of the
 document type represented by this registry entry.
            
          
          
            
              Provides the path name to a local copy of an external entity
 (e.g., a DTD) that is associated with this registry entry.
            
          
          
            
              Provides the class name of any custom XML parser that is
 associated with the registry entry.
            
          
          
            
              Provides the class name of the DocumentBuilderFactory that is
 associated with the registry entry.
            
          
          
            
              Provides the class name of the SAXParserFactory that is
 associated with the registry entry.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSConnectionFactoryMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSConnectionFactoryMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSJDBCStoreMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSJDBCStoreMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The prefix for the JDBC store's database table
 (<code>WLStore</code>), in the following format:
 <code>[[[catalog.]schema.]prefix]</code>.
            
          
          
            
              Specifies the DDL (Data Definition Language) file to use for
 creating the JDBC store's backing table.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to WLSAuthConfigProviderMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WLSAuthConfigProviderMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Get the authentication module
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.WLSAuthConfigProviderMBean Attribute=getAuthModule)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to HTTPProxyMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.HTTPProxyMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The number of initial connections that should be opened to
 each server in the back end servers.</p>
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.HTTPProxyMBean Attribute=getInitialConnections)
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum number of connections that each server can open
 to the back end servers.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The list of servers in the back end that the HCS should proxy
 to.
            
          
          
            
              The health check interval in milliseconds between pings.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The max retries after which the server will be marked dead.
            
          
          
            
              The maximum interval between health checks.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSFileStoreMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSFileStoreMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The path name to the file system directory where the file store
 maintains its data files.
            
          
          
            
              The disk write policy that determines how the file store writes data
 to disk.
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The location of the cache directory for 
 <code>Direct-Write-With-Cache</code>, ignored for other policies.
            
          
          
            
              The minimum amount of data, in bytes and rounded down to the nearest power of 2, mapped into the 
 JVM's address space per primary store file. Applies to synchronous write policies <code>Direct-Write-With-Cache</code> 
 and <code>Disabled</code>, but only when a native <code>wlfileio</code> library is loaded. See
 <a href='#getMaxWindowBufferSize'>Maximum Window Buffer Size</a>.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum amount of data, in bytes and rounded down to the nearest power of 2,
 mapped into the JVM's address space per primary store file. Applies to synchronous write 
 policies <code>Direct-Write-With-Cache</code> and 
 <code>Disabled</code> but only when the native <code>wlfileio</code> library is loaded.
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The I/O buffer size, in bytes, automatically rounded down to the nearest power of 2.
 <ul>
 <li> For the <code>Direct-Write-With-Cache</code> policy when a native
 <code>wlfileio</code> driver is available, <code>IOBufferSize</code> describes 
 the maximum portion of a cache view that is passed to a system call. This portion 
 does not consume off-heap (native) or Java heap memory.</li>

 <li> For the <code>Direct-Write</code> and <code>Cache-Flush</code> policies, 
 <code>IOBufferSize</code> is the size of a per store buffer which consumes 
 off-heap (native) memory, where one buffer is allocated during run-time, 
 but multiple buffers may be temporarily created during boot recovery.</li>

 <li>When a native <code>wlfileio</code> driver is not available, 
 the setting applies to off-heap (native) memory for all policies (including <code>Disabled</code>).</li>

 <li>For the best runtime performance, Oracle recommends setting 
 <code>IOBufferSize</code> so that it is larger than the largest 
 write (multiple concurrent store requests may be combined into a single write).</li>

 <li>For the best boot recovery time performance of large stores, 
 Oracle recommends setting <code>IOBufferSize</code> to at least 2 megabytes.</li>

 See <code>AllocatedIOBufferBytes</code> to find out the actual allocated 
 off-heap (native) memory amount. It is a multiple of <code>IOBufferSize</code> 
 for the <code>Direct-Write</code> and <code>Cache-Flush</code> policies, 
 or zero.</li>

 <li> See <a href='#AllocatedIOBufferBytes'>AllocatedIOBufferBytes</a>.
 </ul>
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The maximum file size, in bytes.  
 <ul> 
 <li>The <code>MaxFileSize</code> value affects the number of files needed to accommodate 
 a store of a particular size (number of files = store size/MaxFileSize rounded up).</li>

 <li>A file store automatically reuses space freed by deleted records and automatically 
  expands individual files up to <code>MaxFileSize</code> if there is not enough space for a new 
 record. If there is no space left in exiting files for a new record, a store creates an additional file.</li>

 <li> A small number of larger files is normally preferred over a large number of smaller files 
 as each file allocates Window Buffer and file handles. </li>

 <code>BlockSize</code>, then <code>MaxFileSize</code> is 
 <code>BlockSize</code>. The default <code>BlockSize</code> is 512, 
 512 is 8 GB. </li>

 <li> See <a href='#getInitialSize'>Initial Size</a>.</li>
 </ul>
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The smallest addressable block, in bytes, of a file.
 When a native <code>wlfileio</code> driver is available
 and the block size has not been configured by the user,
 the store selects the minimum OS specific value for unbuffered
  (direct) I/O, if it is within the range [512, 8192].
            
            
              
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              The initial file size, in bytes. 
 <ul>
 <li>Set <code>InitialSize</code> to pre-allocate 
 file space during a file store boot. If <code>InitialSize</code> exceeds <code>MaxFileSize</code>, 
 a store creates multiple files (number of files = <code>InitialSize</code>/<code>MaxFileSize</code> rounded up).</li>

 <li>A file store automatically reuses the space from deleted records and automatically expands a file if there is not enough space for a new write request.</li>

 <li>Use <code>InitialSize</code> to limit or prevent file expansions 
 during runtime, as file expansion introduces temporary latencies that may be noticeable 
 under rare circumstances. </li>
 <li>Changes to initial size only take effect for new file stores, or after any current files have been deleted prior to restart.</li>

 <li> See <a href='#getMaxFileSize'>Maximum File Size</a>.
 </ul>
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Determines whether OS file locking is used. 
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to VirtualDestinationMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.VirtualDestinationMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The JNDI name used to look up a virtual destination within the
 JNDI namespace. Applications can use the JNDI name to look up the
 virtual destination. If not specified, then the destination is not
 bound into the JNDI namespace.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JDBCMultiPoolMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JDBCMultiPoolMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SCAContainerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SCAContainerMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SCAContainerMBean Attribute=getTimeout)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SCAContainerMBean Attribute=isAutowire)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SCAContainerMBean Attribute=isAllowsPassByReference)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SCAContainerMBean Attribute=isRemotable)
            
          
          
            
              Get max idle time of the a stateful service
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SCAContainerMBean Attribute=getMaxIdleTime)
            
          
          
            
              Get max of a stateful service
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SCAContainerMBean Attribute=getMaxAge)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SCAContainerMBean Attribute=isSinglePrincipal)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSDestinationKeyMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSDestinationKeyMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CacheStoreMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheStoreMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The cache store to be used for store backed caches
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheStoreMBean Attribute=getCustomStore)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheStoreMBean Attribute=getWritePolicy)
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Sets the work manager that schedules
 the thread that writes to the backing store asynchronously
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheStoreMBean Attribute=getWorkManager)
            
          
          
            
              Sets the upper limit for the store buffer
 that's used to write out updates to the store. A value of 0 indicates
 no limit
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheStoreMBean Attribute=getBufferMaxSize)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Sets the time in milliseconds that the
 user thread will wait before aborting an attempt to write to the buffer.
 The attempt to write to the store buffer fails only in case the 
 buffer is
 full. After the timeout, futher attempts may be made to write 
 to the buffer
 based on the value of StoreBufferWriteAttempts
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheStoreMBean Attribute=getBufferWriteTimeout)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Sets the number of attempts that the
 user thread will make to write to the store buffer.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheStoreMBean Attribute=getBufferWriteAttempts)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Sets the number of user updates that are
 picked up from the store buffer to write back to the backing store
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheStoreMBean Attribute=getStoreBatchSize)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to DomainTargetedMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainTargetedMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to EJBComponentMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.EJBComponentMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The path to the Java compiler to use to compile EJBs (e.g. "sj"
 or "javac"). Note: the default must be null. If no JavaCompiler is
 specified on this specific EJBComponent, the default will be pulled
 in the following order from - EJBContainerMBean -
 Server.JavaCompiler.
            
          
          
            
              Provides a list of the options to prepend to the Java compiler
 classpath when you compile Java code.
            
          
          
            
              Provides a list of the options to append to the Java compiler
 classpath when you compile Java code.
            
          
          
            
              The extra options passed to rmic during server-side generation
 are noted here. The default for this attribute must be null. If no
 ExtraRmicOptions are specified on the EJBComponent, the default
 will be pulled from Server.ExtraRmicOptions.
            
          
          
            
              indicates whether KeepGenerated is enabled and the ejbc source
 files will be kept.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether the ForceGeneration is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Return the temporary directory where generated files are stored
 by ejbc. Deprecated: All EJB compiler output is now stored in the
 EJBCompilerCache subdirectory of the server staging directory. This
 directory should not be described as "temporary" since removing it
 would cause the EJB compiler to be rerun as necessary the next time
 the server is restarted.
            
          
          
            
              Indicates whether the VerboseEJBDeployment is enabled.
            
          
          
            
              Returns the extra options passed to ejbc during the dynamic ejbc
 of a jar file. For example: -J-mx128m By default this value is
 null. If no ExtraEJBCOptions are specified on the EJBComponent, the
 default will be pulled from the Server.ExtraEJBCOptions.
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ForeignJMSConnectionFactoryMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ForeignJMSConnectionFactoryMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to AdminMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.AdminMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CacheTransactionMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheTransactionMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              Setting this property to something other than none will make this
 cache transactional
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheTransactionMBean Attribute=getConcurrency)
            
            
              
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheTransactionMBean Attribute=getIsolationLevel)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to AdminServerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.AdminServerMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JDBCDataSourceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JDBCDataSourceMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JDBCTxDataSourceMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JDBCTxDataSourceMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to StuckThreadActionMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.StuckThreadActionMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              WorkManager name for which stuck thread actions need to be performed.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.StuckThreadActionMBean Attribute=getWorkManagerName)
            
          
          
            
              Module name to which the stuck WorkManager belongs
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.StuckThreadActionMBean Attribute=getModuleName)
            
          
          
            
              Application name to which the stuck WorkManager belongs
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.StuckThreadActionMBean Attribute=getApplicationName)
            
          
          
            
              Minimum number of stuck threads required to take action
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.StuckThreadActionMBean Attribute=getMaxStuckThreadsCount)
            
          
          
            
              Action to be taken when the stuck thread limit is reached.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.StuckThreadActionMBean Attribute=getActionCode)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CacheMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The JNDI name that the cache should to be bound to
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheMBean Attribute=getJNDIName)
            
          
          
            
              Maximum number of cache elements in memory after which eviction/paging
 occurs. This value is defined as an Integer.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheMBean Attribute=getMaxCacheUnits)
            
            
              
                
              
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheMBean Attribute=getExpiration)
            
          
          
            
              The eviction policy to choose when the number of entries in cache
 hits the maximum
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheMBean Attribute=getEvictionPolicy)
            
            
              
                
                
                
                
              
            
          
          
            
              Set the default work manager to use for all asynchronous caching tasks.
 If none of the specific work managers are specified, this work manager 
 is used. This work manager may be overriden by other work managers
 configured for specific tasks like store backup, listeners etc
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheMBean Attribute=getWorkManager)
            
          
          
            
              The configuration parameters for self-loading caches
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheMBean Attribute=getLoader)
            
          
          
            
              The configuraiton parameters for self-backing caches
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheMBean Attribute=getStore)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheMBean Attribute=getTransactional)
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheMBean Attribute=getAsyncListeners)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to CacheLoaderMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheLoaderMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The custom loader to be used for self loading caches
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.CacheLoaderMBean Attribute=getCustomLoader)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSTopicMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSTopicMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ForeignJMSServerMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ForeignJMSServerMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to DomainLogFilterMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.DomainLogFilterMBean)
    
    
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to ConnectorComponentMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ConnectorComponentMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The flag that indicates whether to store connection call
 stacks.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.ConnectorComponentMBean Attribute=getAuthenticationMechanismsAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to SingletonServiceAppScopedMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingletonServiceAppScopedMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              The fully qualified name of a class to load and run. The class
 must be on the server's classpath.
            
          
          
            
              The subdeployment groups within this JMS module. Subdeployments enable 
 you to deploy some resources in a JMS module to a JMS server and other 
 JMS resources to a server instance or cluster.
            
          
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingletonServiceAppScopedMBean Attribute=getTargetsAsString)
            
          
          
            
              The values match those defined by jsr88. This attribute may move to another MBean.
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.SingletonServiceAppScopedMBean Attribute=getModuleType)
            
          
          
            
              
 This is only set for beans created as a result of conversion from an
 8.1 application configured using ApplicationMBean and ComponentMBean.
 
            
          
        
      
    
  
  
    
      Corresponds to JMSDistributedTopicMemberMBean
 (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSDistributedTopicMemberMBean)
    
    
      
        
          
            
              (Interface=weblogic.management.configuration.JMSDistributedTopicMemberMBean Attribute=getJMSTopicAsString)
            
          
        
      
    
  
  





© 2015 - 2025 Weber Informatics LLC | Privacy Policy